Autodesk land desktop 2006 tutorials
Upcoming SlideShare
Loading in...5
×

Like this? Share it with your network

Share

Autodesk land desktop 2006 tutorials

  • 5,282 views
Uploaded on

 

  • Full Name Full Name Comment goes here.
    Are you sure you want to
    Your message goes here
    Be the first to comment
No Downloads

Views

Total Views
5,282
On Slideshare
5,281
From Embeds
1
Number of Embeds
1

Actions

Shares
Downloads
323
Comments
0
Likes
1

Embeds 1

http://www.slideshare.net 1

Report content

Flagged as inappropriate Flag as inappropriate
Flag as inappropriate

Select your reason for flagging this presentation as inappropriate.

Cancel
    No notes for slide

Transcript

  • 1. By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials Table of Contents ‫ﻓﻬﺮس اﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎت‬ 7 ............................................................ Lesson 1: Working with Projects ‫اﻟﺪرس اﻷول: اﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻊ اﻟﻤﺸﺎرﻳﻊ‬ 7 ......................................................... Creating a New Drawing and Project ‫إﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺸﺮوع و رﺳﻢ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬ 8 .....................................................................Setting Up the Point Database ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺎﻋﺪة ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﻨﻘﺎط‬ 9 .................................................................................. Setting Up the New Drawing ‫إﻋﺪاد رﺳﻢ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬ 14 ............................................. Reviewing the Project Directory Structure ‫اﺳﺘﻌﺮاض ﻣﺠﻠﺪات اﻟﻤﺸﺮوع‬ 15 ............................................. Lesson 2: Changing Project Settings ‫اﻟﺪرس اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ: ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ إﻋﺪادات اﻟﻤﺸﺮوع‬ 15 ..... Copying a Project and Re-associating the Current Drawing ‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﺸﺮوع و إﻋﺎدة رﺑﻂ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‬ 17 ................................................... Changing Drawing Setup Parameters ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺿﻮاﺑﻂ إﻋﺪادات اﻟﺮﺳﻢ‬ 20 ................................................................................ Editing Drawing Settings ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ إﻋﺪادات اﻟﺮﺳﻢ‬ 22 ..................................................... Lesson 3: Working with Point Objects ‫اﻟﺪرس اﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ: اﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻊ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط‬ 22 ........................................................................................... Listing Point Objects ‫اﺳﺘﻌﺮاض اﻟﻨﻘﺎط‬ 23 ........................................ Inserting Points from the Point Database ‫إدراج ﻧﻘﺎط ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﻋﺪة ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﻨﻘﺎط‬ 25 .............................................................................. Changing Point Elevations ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﻴﺐ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط‬ 27 ....................................................... Changing Point Display Properties ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﻋﺮض اﻟﻨﻘﺎط‬ 28 .......................................................... Changing Point Markers and Text ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ و اﻟﻨﺺ‬ 31 ........................................ Controlling Point Display by Layer ‫اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮض اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺎت‬ 32 .............................................................................. Lesson 4:Creating Points ‫اﻟﺪرس اﻟﺮاﺑﻊ: إﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﻘﺎط‬ 32 ................................................................................... Creating Points Manually ‫إﻧﺸﺎء اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﻳﺪوﻳﺎ‬ 33 .............................. Specifying Automatic Elevations and Descriptions ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﺴﻮب و وﺻﻒ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ 34 ............................................... Creating Points in the Points Database ‫إﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﻘﺎط داﺧﻞ ﻗﺎﻋﺪة اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت‬ 36 ........................................................................... Placing Points on an Object ‫إﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﻘﺎط ﻋﻠﻰ آﺎﺋﻦ‬ 36 ................................................... Placing Points Along an Alignment ‫إﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﻘﺎط ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﻮل ﺧﻂ اﻧﺤﻴﺎز‬ 37 .......................................................................... Placing Points on a Surface ‫إﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﻘﺎط ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ‬ 39 ............................................................................ Lesson5: Editing Points ‫اﻟﺪرس اﻟﺨﺎﻣﺲ: ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط‬ 39 ................................................................................... Selecting Points to Edit ‫اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ‬ 41 .......................................................................................... Unlocking Points ‫إزاﻟﺔ اﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻦ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط‬ 42 ..........................................................................Editing Point Datum ‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﺎرﻧﺔ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط‬ 43 ............................ Editing Points with AutoCAD Commands AutoCAD ‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام أواﻣﺮ اﻟـ‬ 44 .............................................................................................Using Check Points ‫اﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط‬ 46 ....................................... Lesson 6: Working with Point Groups ‫اﻟﺪرس اﻟﺴﺎدس: اﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎت اﻟﻨﻘﺎط‬ 46 ..................................................................................... Creating a Point Group ‫ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻧﻘﺎط‬ Creating a Point Group Using the Raw Desc ‫إﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻧﻘﺎط ﺟﺪﻳﺪة ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ اﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ 47 .......................................................................................................................... Matching Tab 49 .............................................. Applying Overrides to Point Groups ‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ اﻟﻬﻴﻤﻨﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎت اﻟﻨﻘﺎط‬ 51 ............................................................................... Updating Point Groups ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎت اﻟﻨﻘﺎط‬ 53 ................................................... Organizing Points by Descriptions ‫اﻟﺪرس اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻊ: ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ 53 .................................................................. Creating a Description Key File ‫إﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح وﺻﻒ‬ 55 ................................................................................ Creating Description Keys ‫إﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﻔﺘﺎح وﺻﻒ‬ 57 ....................................................................................... Creating a Label Style ‫إﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﺴﻖ اﻟﻌﻨﻮان‬ 59 ......................................................Inserting Points with Description Keys ‫إدراج ﻧﻘﺎط ﺑﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ وﺻﻒ‬ 60 ...... Lesson 8: Importing Points from an ASCII Text File ‫ اﻟﻨﺼﻲ‬ASCII ‫اﻟﺪرس اﻟﺜﺎﻣﻦ: اﺳﺘﻴﺮاد ﻧﻘﺎط ﻣﻦ ﻣﻠﻒ‬ 60 .......................................................................... Creating a Point File Format ‫إﻧﺸﺎء هﻴﺌﺔ ﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻧﻘﺎط‬ 63 ................................................... Importing an ASCII Text Point File ‫ ﻧﺼﻲ‬ASCII ‫اﺳﺘﻴﺮاد ﻣﻠﻒ ﻧﻘﺎط‬ Lesson 9: Labeling Lines, Curves, Spirals ‫اﻟﺪرس اﻟﺘﺎﺳﻊ: ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ اﻟﺨﻄﻮط و اﻟﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﺎت و اﻷﺷﻜﺎل اﻟﺤﻠﺰوﻧﻴﺔ و اﻟﻨﻘﺎط‬ 66 .................................................................................................................................. and Points 66 ............................................................................... Changing Label Settings ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ إﻋﺪادات اﻟﻌﻨﻮﻧﺔ‬ 68 ........................................................................... Labeling Lines and Points ‫ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ اﻟﺨﻄﻮط و اﻟﻨﻘﺎط‬ 71 ................................................ Changing a Label Attached to an Object ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ اﻟﻌﻨﻮان اﻟﻤﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﺑﻜﺎﺋﻦ‬ 73 ... Lesson 10: Creating Label Styles for Lines and Points ‫اﻟﺪرس اﻟﻌﺎﺷﺮ: إﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﺴﻖ اﻟﻌﻨﻮﻧﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﻄﻮط و اﻟﻨﻘﺎط‬ 73 ........................................................ Creating a New Line Label Style ‫إﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﺴﻖ ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻠﺨﻄﻮط‬ 76 ........................................................................................................... Labeling a Line ‫ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ ﺧﻂ‬ -3-
  • 2. By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials 77 ..........................................................Creating a New Point Label Style ‫إﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﺴﻖ ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻠﻨﻘﺎط‬ 79 ........................................................................................................ Labeling a Point ‫ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬ 82 Lesson 11: Creating Tag Labels and Object Tables ‫اﻟﺪرس اﻟﺤﺎدي ﻋﺸﺮ: إﻧﺸﺎء ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ و ﺟﺪاول ﻟﻠﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎت‬ 82 .................................................................... Creating a New Tag Style ‫إﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﺴﻖ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ اﻟﻌﻨﻮﻧﺔ‬ 83 .................................................................... Labeling Objects with Tags ‫ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ اﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎت ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ‬ 84 ..................................................................................... Creating a Line Table ‫إﻧﺸﺎء ﺟﺪول ﻟﻠﺨﻄﻮط‬ 87 ...................................................................................... Creating a Point Table ‫إﻧﺸﺎء ﺟﺪول ﻟﻠﻨﻘﺎط‬ 91 ........................................... Updating (Re-drawing) an Object Table ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ )إﻋﺎدة ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ( ﺟﺪول‬ 92 ............................................................................ Understanding Table Objects ‫ﻓﻬﻢ اﻟﺠﺪول آﻜﺎﺋﻦ‬ 96 ... Lesson 12: Working with the Terrain Model Explorer‫اﻟﺪرس اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﺸﺮ: اﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﻧﻤﻮذج اﻷرض‬ 96 .................................................................... Creating a New Surface Folder ‫إﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﻟﺴﻄﺢ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬ 97 ........................................................................................Adding Point Data ‫إﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﻣﻦ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط‬ 98 .......................................................................... Adding Contour Data ‫إﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﻣﻦ ﺧﻄﻮط آﻨﺘﻮر‬ 99 .................................................. Adding Breakline Data from Points ‫إﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﺧﻂ اﻧﻜﺴﺎر ﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﺎط‬ 102 ............. Adding Breakline Data from 3D Polylines ‫إﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﺧﻂ اﻧﻜﺴﺎر ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﻌﺪد ﺧﻄﻮط ﺛﻼﺛﻲ اﻷﺑﻌﺎد‬ 103 ..................... Adding Breakline Data from 2D Polylines ‫إﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺧﻂ اﻧﻜﺴﺎر ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﻌﺪد ﺧﻄﻮط ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ اﻷﺑﻌﺎد‬ 105 ............................................................. Adding Surface Boundary Data ‫إﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﺣﺪود اﻟﺴﻄﺢ‬ 106 .....................................................................................................Building a Surface ‫ﺑﻨﺎء ﺳﻄﺢ‬ 108 ............................................................ Lesson 13: Editing Surfaces ‫اﻟﺪرس اﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ ﻋﺸﺮ: ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ اﻷﺳﻄﺢ‬ 108 ................................................................ Identifying Triangulation Problems ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺸﺎآﻞ اﻟﺘﺜﻠﻴﺚ‬ 109 .......................................................................... Adding Points to the Surface ‫إﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻧﻘﺎط ﻟﻠﺴﻄﺢ‬ 110 .............................................. Adding and Deleting TIN Lines ‫إﺿﺎﻓﺔ أو ﺣﺬف ﺧﻄﻮط ﻣﻦ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ اﻟﻤﺜﻠﺜﺎت‬ 111 ................................................................................... Flipping TIN Faces ‫ﻗﻠﺐ أوﺟﻪ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ اﻟﻤﺜﻠﺜﺎت‬ 113 ................................................................. Applying Surface Edit History ‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺳﺠﻞ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ اﻟﺴﻄﺢ‬ 114 .......................................................... Lesson 14: Creating Contours ‫اﻟﺪرس اﻟﺮاﺑﻊ ﻋﺸﺮ: إﻧﺸﺎء اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر‬ 114 ................................................................................................. Creating Contours ‫إﻧﺸﺎء اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر‬ 115 .................................................................. Creating a New Contour Style ‫إﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﺴﻖ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻠﻜﻨﺘﻮر‬ 118 ................................................................. Applying a New Contour Style ‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻧﺴﻖ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻠﻜﻨﺘﻮر‬ 119 ........................................................................... Labeling Contours (‫ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر )إدراج اﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﻴﺐ‬ 121 .......................................................................... Converting Contour Objects ‫ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ آﺎﺋﻦ اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر‬ 122 ................................................................................................... Editing Contours ‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر‬ 124 ................................................... Lesson 15: Generating Sections ‫اﻟﺪرس اﻟﺨﺎﻣﺲ ﻋﺸﺮ: ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ اﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎت‬ 124 ...... Defining and Processing Sections From Single Surface ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ و ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ اﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎت ﻣﻦ ﺳﻄﺢ واﺣﺪ‬ 125 ........................................ Importing Sections From Single Surface ‫اﺳﺘﻴﺮاد اﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎت ﻣﻦ ﺳﻄﺢ واﺣﺪ‬ 126 .. Creating and Processing Sections from Multiple Surfaces ‫إﻧﺸﺎء و ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ اﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎت ﻣﻦ أﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة‬ 127 ..................................Importing Sections From Multiple Surfaces ‫اﺳﺘﻴﺮاد اﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎت ﻣﻦ أﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة‬ 127 .................................................................... Viewing Dynamic Sections ‫ﻣﺸﺎهﺪة اﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎت اﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮآﺔ‬ 130 ..................................................... Lesson 16: Visualizing Surfaces ‫اﻟﺪرس اﻟﺴﺎدس ﻋﺸﺮ: ﺗﺼﻮر اﻟﺴﻄﺢ‬ 130 ........................................................................ Creating Elevation Banding ‫إﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎت اﻻرﺗﻔﺎع‬ 132 ......................................... Viewing Surfaces in the Object Viewer ‫ﻣﺸﺎهﺪة اﻷﺳﻄﺢ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺸﺎهﺪ اﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎت‬ 133 ................................. Using Object Viewer Navigation Tools ‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪام أدوات اﻟﻤﻼﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺸﺎهﺪ اﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎت‬ 134 ............................................................ Delineating Watershed Areas ‫ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺎت ﻣﺠﺎري اﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ‬ 138 .........................................Lesson 17: Calculating Site Volumes ‫اﻟﺪرس اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻊ ﻋﺸﺮ: ﺣﺴﺎب آﻤﻴﺎت ﻣﻮﻗﻊ‬ 138 .................................................................... Defining a Stratum and a Site ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ و اﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‬ 141 ................................................................... Calculating Grid Volumes ‫ﺣﺴﺎب اﻟﻜﻤﻴﺎت ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ 144 ..................................................... Calculating Composite Volumes ‫ﺣﺴﺎب اﻟﻜﻤﻴﺎت ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ اﻟﻤﺮآﺒﺎت‬ 146 ............................................. Calculating Section Method Volumes ‫ﺣﺴﺎب اﻟﻜﻤﻴﺎت ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ اﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎت‬ 148 .........................................................................Viewing the Volume Report ‫ﻣﺸﺎهﺪة ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺮ اﻟﻜﻤﻴﺎت‬ 149 ..................................................................... Calculating Parcel Volumes ‫ﺣﺴﺎب آﻤﻴﺔ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ أرض‬ 151 ................................................... Generating Cut and Fill Contours ‫ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺧﻄﻮط آﻨﺘﻮر ﻟﻠﺤﻔﺮ و اﻟﺮدم‬ 153 ..................................................... Generating Grid Ticks and Labels ‫ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺎت اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ و اﻟﻌﻨﻮﻧﺔ‬ 155 . Lesson 18: Drawing Tangents, Curves, and Spirals ‫اﻟﺪرس اﻟﺜﺎﻣﻦ ﻋﺸﺮ: رﺳﻢ اﻟﻤﻤﺎس و اﻟﻤﻨﺤﻨﻰ و اﻟﺤﻠﺰون‬ 155 ................................................................................................... Drawing Tangents ‫رﺳﻢ ﻣﻤﺎس‬ -4-
  • 3. By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials 156 .................................................................................................... Drawing Curves ‫رﺳﻢ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻴﺎت‬ 157 ...................................................................................................... Drawing Spirals ‫رﺳﻢ ﺣﻠﺰون‬ 158 ........................................................................ Working with Speed Tables ‫اﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺠﺪاول اﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬ 162 ................................................ Attaching Multiple Alignment Objects ‫رﺑﻂ ﻋﺪة آﺎﺋﻨﺎت ﺧﻄﻮط اﻧﺤﻴﺎز‬ 164 ............... Lesson 19: Defining and Editing Alignments ‫اﻟﺪرس اﻟﺘﺎﺳﻊ ﻋﺸﺮ: ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ و ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺧﻄﻮط اﻻﻧﺤﻴﺎز‬ 164 ........................................ Defining an Alignment from a Polyline ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺧﻂ اﻧﺤﻴﺎز ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﻌﺪد ﺧﻄﻮط‬ 165 .............................................. Defining an Alignment from Objects ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺧﻂ اﻧﺤﻴﺎز ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪة آﺎﺋﻨﺎت‬ 167 ........................................... Viewing and Editing Alignment Data ‫ﻣﺸﺎهﺪة و ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﺧﻂ اﻻﻧﺤﻴﺎز‬ 169 ................................................................Generating Alignment Reports ‫ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺗﻘﺎرﻳﺮ ﻟﺨﻂ اﻻﻧﺤﻴﺎز‬ Lesson 20: Creating Alignment Stationing and Offsets ‫اﻟﺪرس اﻟﻌﺸﺮون: إﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺤﻄﺎت و إزاﺣﺔ ﻟﺨﻂ اﻻﻧﺤﻴﺎز‬ 171 ................................................................................................................................................. 171 .......................................................................... Changing Station Settings ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ إﻋﺪادات اﻟﻤﺤﻄﺔ‬ 173 ........................................................... Generating Alignment Stationing ‫ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻣﺤﻄﺎت ﺧﻂ اﻻﻧﺤﻴﺎز‬ 176 ..................................................................................................... Creating Offsets ‫إﻧﺸﺎء إزاﺣﺔ‬ -5-
  • 4. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ هﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪروس و اﻟﺘﻲ هﻲ ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺘﻌﺮض ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ اﻟﺪروس و ﻓﻲ هﺬﻩ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫اﺳﺘﻌﺎدة اﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ اﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ و ﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ إﻟﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ اﻟﻤﺸﺎرﻳﻊ و هﻲ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﺴﺎر اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ:‬ ‫‪C:Program FilesLand Desktop 2006Landtut‬‬ ‫ﻓﺈذا آﻨﺖ ﻗﺪ أﺟﺮﻳﺖ درس ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ و ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻄﺒـﻴـﻘﻪ ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺗﻪ إﻟﻲ هﺬا اﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ 6002 ‪Land Projects‬‬ ‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻀﻤﻦ ﺗﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ ﻋﻨﺪ إﺟﺮاء اﻟﺪرس ﻣﻦ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ.‬ ‫-6-‬
  • 5. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫اﻟﺪرس اﻷول: اﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻊ اﻟﻤﺸﺎرﻳﻊ ‪Lesson 1: Working with Projects‬‬ ‫أول ﻣﺎ ﻳﺠﺐ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺘﻪ هﻮ أن اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ‪ Drawings‬ﻳﺠﺐ أن ﻳﻜﻮن ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﺑﻤﺸﺮوع ‪ Project‬و اﻟﻤﺸﺮوع ﻋﺒﺎرة ﻋﻦ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻟﺤﻔﻆ اﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎت‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮن رﺳﻮﻣﺎت أو ﻧﻘﺎط أو أﺳﻄﺢ أو ﺧﻂ أﻧﺎﺑﻴﺐ أو أرﺻﺎد ﻣﺴﺎﺣﻴﺔ.‬ ‫إن ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﻤﺸﺮوع ﻻ ﺗﺤﻔﻆ داﺧﻞ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ‪ Drawing‬و ﻟﻜﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪات ‪ Folders‬ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ داﺧﻞ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم.‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ هﺬا اﻟﺪرس:‬ ‫1- ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Land Desktop‬‬ ‫2- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Projects‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Workspaces‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Land Desktop‬ﻟﺘﻌﺮض ﻗﻮاﺋﻢ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Land Desktop‬‬ ‫إﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺸﺮوع و رﺳﻢ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ‪Creating a New Drawing and Project‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﻮف ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻢ آﻴﻔﻴﺔ إﻧﺸﺎء رﺳﻢ ‪ Drawing‬و ﻣﺸﺮوع ‪ Project‬ﺟﺪﻳﺪﻳﻦ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻄﻴﻦ ﺑﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﻟﺤﻔﻆ اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت.‬ ‫1- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ File‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪.New‬‬ ‫2- أدﺧﻞ 1_‪ Lesson‬أﻣﺎم اﻻﺳﻢ ‪) Name‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 1(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 1‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ اﻟـ ‪ Project and Drawing Location‬ﺗﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ أن اﻟﻤﺴﺎر هﻮ 6002 ‪) Land Projects‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 1( ﺛﻢ‬ ‫3-‬ ‫أﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Create Project‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ Project Details‬ﻹدﺧﺎل ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﻤﺸﺮوع )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 2(.‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Initial Settings for New Drawings‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر )‪ Default (Meters‬ﻣﻦ أﻣﺎم ‪) Prototype‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬ ‫4-‬ ‫2(.‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Project Information‬ادﺧﻞ 1_‪ Project‬أﻣﺎم ‪ Name‬آﺎﺳﻢ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺮوع )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 2(.‬ ‫5-‬ ‫ادﺧﻞ ‪ Project for Exploring Land Desktop Startup‬أﻣﺎم ‪ Description‬آﻮﺻﻒ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺮوع و ادﺧﻞ‬ ‫6-‬ ‫‪ Training‬أﻣﺎم ‪ Keywords‬آﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺮوع )أﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 2(.‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Drawing Path for this Project‬ﺗﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ‪) Project "DWG" Folder‬أﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 2(.‬ ‫7-‬ ‫-7-‬
  • 6. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 2‬ ‫8- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﺘﺮﺟﻊ إﻟﻰ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.New Drawing: Project Based‬‬ ‫9- ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Select Drawing Template‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻲ ‪ Browse‬و اذهﺐ إﻟﻰ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ اﻟﻘﻮاﻟﺐ ‪ Template folder‬و‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺎرﻩ اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ هﻮ:‬ ‫‪C:Program FilesLand Desktop 2006Template‬‬ ‫و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻘﻮاﻟﺐ ‪ Template list‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪) aec_m.dwt‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 1(.‬ ‫01- ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Project and Drawing Location‬ﺗﺄآﺪ أن ‪ Project Name‬ﺗﻌﺮض 1_‪ Project‬و أن ‪Drawing‬‬ ‫‪ Path‬هﻮ ‪) Land Projects 2006 Project_1dwg‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 1(.‬ ‫11- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻲ ‪ OK‬ﻹﻧﺸﺎء اﻟﻤﺸﺮوع اﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ.‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺎﻋﺪة ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ‪Setting Up the Point Database‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﻮف ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻢ آﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﻀﻮاﺑﻂ ‪ Parameters‬ﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻗﺎﻋﺪة ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﻨﻘﺎط.‬ ‫1- ﺑﻌﺪ إﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺸﺮوع ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺳﻮف ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ Create Point Database‬ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﻗﺎﻋﺪة ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﺟﺪﻳﺪة، ﺗﺄآﺪ أن‬ ‫اﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ أﻣﺎم ‪ Point Description Field Size‬هﻲ 23 ﺣﺮف )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 3(.‬ ‫2- ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر ‪ Use Point Names‬ﺛﻢ ﺗﺄآﺪ أن اﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ أﻣﺎم ‪ Point Name Field Size‬هﻲ 61 ﺣﺮف )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 3(.‬ ‫3- أﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺮار.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 3‬ ‫-8-‬
  • 7. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫إﻋﺪاد رﺳﻢ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ‪Setting Up the New Drawing‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﻮف ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻢ آﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﻀﻮاﺑﻂ ‪ Parameters‬ﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ اﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ.‬ ‫1- ﺑﻌﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺎﻋﺪة ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﻧﻘﺎط اﻟﻤﺸﺮوع ﺳﻮف ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻨﺪوق ﺣﻮاري ﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ اﻹﻋﺪادات ‪ Load Settings‬ﻓﺘﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ أن اﻟﻤﺴﺎر‬ ‫‪ Path‬هﻮ ‪) Program FilesLand Desktop 2006DataSetup‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 4(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 4‬ ‫2- ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Load a Drawing Setup Profile‬و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Profile Name‬اﺧﺘﺮ )005:1 ,‪m500.set (Metric‬‬ ‫)اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 4( ﺛﻢ أﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻲ ‪ View‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪) View Drawing Setup Profile‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 5(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 5‬ ‫-9-‬
  • 8. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﻓﻲ )ﺷﻜﻞ 5( أن ‪ Coordinate Zone‬و ‪ Text Style‬و ‪ Drawing Border‬ﻳﺤﺘﺎﺟﻮا ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻬﺬا اﻟﺮﺳﻢ آﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.‬ ‫3- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮع إﻟﻰ ‪ Load Settings‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Load‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻘﻮم ﺑﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ‪.m500 Profile‬‬ ‫4- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Next‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق ﺣﻮار اﻟﻮﺣﺪات ‪ Units‬و ﺗﺘﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻮﺣﺪات )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 6(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 6‬ ‫5- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Next‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق ﺣﻮار اﻟﻤﻘﻴﺎس ‪ Scale‬و اﻟﺘﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻤﻘﻴﺎس )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 7(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 7‬ ‫ﻣﻘﻴﺎس اﻟﺮﺳﻢ اﻷﻓﻘﻲ ‪ Horizontal Scale‬ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻓﻲ إدراج اﻟﻜﺘﻞ اﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﻴﺔ ‪ (Block Insertion) Drawing Block‬و ﻣﻘﺎس اﻟﻨﺺ‬ ‫‪ Text Size‬اﻟﺬي ﻳﻨﺸﺄ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ، أﻣﺎ اﻟﻤﻘﻴﺎس اﻟﺮأﺳﻲ ‪ Vertical Scale‬ﻳﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻘﺪار اﻟﻤﺒﺎﻟﻐﺔ اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ‪Default Vertical‬‬ ‫‪ Exaggeration‬ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎت اﻟﻌﺮﺿﻴﺔ و اﻟﻄﻮﻟﻴﺔ ‪ Profiles and Cross Sections‬اﻟﻤﻨﺸﺄة ﺑﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Civil Design‬‬ ‫6- اﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Next‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق ﺣﻮار اﻟﻨﻄﺎق ‪) Zone‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 8(.‬ ‫- 01 -‬
  • 9. By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials 8 ‫ﺷﻜﻞ‬ ‫ اﺧﺘﺮ‬Available Coordinate Systems ‫ ﺛﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬UTM, NAD 83 Datum ‫ اﺧﺘﺮ‬Categories ‫7- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ .(8 ‫ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬UTM with NAD 83 Datum, Zone 11, Meter; Central Meridian 117d W .(9 ‫ و اﻟﺘﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ إﻋﺪاداﺗﻪ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬Orientation ‫ ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق ﺣﻮار اﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ‬Next ‫8- اﺿﻐﻂ‬ 9 ‫ﺷﻜﻞ‬ ‫ اﺧﺘﺮ‬Style Set Name ‫، ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬Text Style ‫ ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق ﺣﻮار ﻧﺴﻖ اﻟﻨﺺ‬Next ‫9- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ .(10 ‫ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬mleroy ‫ ﻟﻜﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﻧﺴﻖ اﻟﻨﺺ‬Load ‫ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬mleroy.stp - 11 -
  • 10. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 01‬ ‫01- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Select Current Style‬اﺧﺘﺮ 001‪) L‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 01(.‬ ‫11- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Next‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق ﺣﻮار اﻹﻃﺎر ‪) Border‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 11(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 11‬ ‫21- ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Border Selection‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Scaled Block‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Browse‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪Select a‬‬ ‫‪) Custom Block‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 11(.‬ ‫31- ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ أﺧﺘﺮ ‪) pm_841x594.dwg‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 21( ﺛﻢ أﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Open‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮع إﻟﻰ ﺻﻨﺪوق ﺣﻮار اﻹﻃﺎر‬ ‫‪.Border‬‬ ‫- 21 -‬
  • 11. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 21‬ ‫41- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Next‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق ﺣﻮار ﺣﻔﻆ اﻹﻋﺪادات ‪.Save Settings‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 31‬ ‫إذا آﻨﺖ ﺗﻮد ﺣﻔﻆ اﻹﻋﺪادات ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪاﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻼ ﻓﻲ رﺳﻮﻣﺎت ‪ Drawings‬أﺧﺮى، ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺈدﺧﺎل اﺳﻢ أﻣﺎم ‪ Profile Name‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) Save‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 31(.‬ ‫51- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Finish‬ﻟﺘﻨﻬﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ إﻋﺪاد اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ‪.Drawing Setup‬‬ ‫61- ﺳﻮف ﺗﻈﻬﺮ أﻣﺎﻣﻚ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻹﻋﺪادات اﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎرهﺎ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ.‬ ‫- 31 -‬
  • 12. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 41‬ ‫اﺳﺘﻌﺮاض ﻣﺠﻠﺪات اﻟﻤﺸﺮوع ‪Reviewing the Project Directory Structure‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﻮف ﺗﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﻣﺠﻠﺪات اﻟﻤﺸﺮوع ‪ Directory Structure‬ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ® ‪.Windows Explorer‬‬ ‫1- ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ® ‪ Windows Explorer‬و اذهﺐ إﻟﻲ 6002 ‪.Land Projects‬‬ ‫2- أﻓﺘﺢ اﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ 6002 ‪ Land Projects‬و اﺳﺘﻌﺮض ﻣﺠﻠﺪات اﻟﻤﺸﺎرﻳﻊ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺑﺪاﺧﻠﻪ.‬ ‫3- أﻓﺘﺢ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ اﻟﻤﺸﺮوع 1_‪ Project‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض اﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪات ﺑﺪاﺧﻠﻪ و اﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺤﻔﻆ آﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻦ اﻷﺧﺮ.‬ ‫آﻞ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﺗﺤﻔﻆ داﺧﻞ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ اﻟـ ‪ COGO‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت )‪ Microsoft® database (.mdb‬و اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﻮي ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎت اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ‪Point‬‬ ‫‪ Groups‬و ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ اﻟﻮﺻﻒ ‪.Description Keys‬‬ ‫أﻣﺎ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ‪ DWG‬ﻓﻴﺤﺘﻮي ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﺎت ‪ Drawing‬و اﻟﺘﻲ هﻲ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻄﺔ ﺑﻬﺬا اﻟﻤﺸﺮوع و أﻳﻀﺎ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪ .dfm‬و اﻟﺘﻲ هﻲ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻧﻮع ‪ ASCII text‬و ﺗﺤﺘﻮي ﻋﻠﻰ إﻋﺪادات اﻟﺮﺳﻢ اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻴﺔ ‪.Default Drawing Settings‬‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻠﺪ اﻟـ ‪ SURVEY‬ﻳﺤﺘﻮي ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟـ ‪ Raw‬اﻟﻤﺤﻤﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻷﺟﻬﺰة اﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﻴﺔ ‪ Data Collectors‬و ‪ Field Book‬و‬ ‫‪ Observation Database‬و ‪ ، Traverse Adjustment Files‬و ﻳﺒﻘﻰ هﺬا اﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﻓﺎرﻏﺎ إﻟﻰ أن ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫‪.Autodesk Survey‬‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪات ‪ Folders‬ﺗﻨﺸﺄ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم ‪ Autodesk Land Desktop‬ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻊ اﻷﺳﻄﺢ ‪ Surfaces‬ﻓﻴﺘﻢ إﻧﺸﺎء‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ‪ DTM‬و اﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ‪ ALIGN‬ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻊ اﻟـ ‪ Alignments‬و اﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ‪ Lots‬ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻊ اﻟـ ‪ Parcels‬و اﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ‪ ER‬ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫اﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻊ اﻟـ ‪.Volumes‬‬ ‫و اﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪات ‪ Folders‬ﺗﻨﺸﺄ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم ‪ Autodesk Civil Design‬ﻓﻴﻨﺸﺄ اﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ‪ PIPEWKS‬ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫اﻟـ ‪ Pipes‬و اﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ‪ HD‬ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻊ اﻟـ ‪ Hydrology‬و اﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ‪ CD‬ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻊ اﻟـ ‪.Sheet Manager‬‬ ‫- 41 -‬
  • 13. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫اﻟﺪرس اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ: ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ إﻋﺪادات اﻟﻤﺸﺮوع ‪Lesson 2: Changing Project Settings‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺪرس ﺑﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﺸﺮوع ﻻﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺗﻪ ﻣﻊ رﺳﻮﻣﺎت أﺧﺮى ﺛﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ إﻋﺪادات اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻟﺘﺤﺪد ﺣﻮاﺷﻲ ﺟﺪﻳﺪة و آﻴﻔﻴﺔ إﻧﺸﺎء‬ ‫اﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎت و اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﺎت اﻟﺤﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ.‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ هﺬا اﻟﺪرس:‬ ‫1- ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Land Desktop‬‬ ‫2- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Projects‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Workspaces‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Land Desktop‬ﻟﺘﻌﺮض ﻗﻮاﺋﻢ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Land Desktop‬‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﺸﺮوع و إﻋﺎدة رﺑﻂ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ‪Copying a Project and Re-associating the Current Drawing‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺪرس ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﻨﺴﺦ اﻟﻤﺸﺮوع إﻟﻰ ﻣﺸﺮوع ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﻴﺚ أن ﺑﻌﺾ اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ و ﻟﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﻔﻆ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺸﺮوع و ﻟﺬا ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ أﺧﺮي ﻣﻦ هﺬا اﻟﻤﺸﺮوع.‬ ‫أﻳﻀﺎ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﺴﺦ أي ﻣﺸﺮوع ﻧﺸﻂ أو اﻟﻤﺸﺮوع اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ و ﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﺸﺮوع ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ Land Desktop‬و ﻗﺒﻞ اﻟﺸﺮوع ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻞ رﺳﻢ أو ﻣﺸﺮوع ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ …‪ Project Mgr‬و اﺳﺘﺨﺪم ﺧﻴﺎر اﻟﻨﺴﺦ ‪.Copy Option‬‬ ‫1- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Projects‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Project Manager‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Project Management‬‬ ‫2- ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Project‬و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Name‬أﺧﺘﺮ 1‪ Tutorial‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Copy‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪) Copy‬اﻧﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 51(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 51‬ ‫3- ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Copy Project To‬أدﺧﻞ ‪ TutorialC‬أﻣﺎم ‪) Name‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 61(.‬ ‫- 51 -‬
  • 14. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 61‬ ‫4- ادﺧﻞ ‪ Building site - Northwest corner‬أﻣﺎم ‪ Description‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪) OK‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 61(.‬ ‫إن اﻟﻤﺸﺮوع اﻟﻤﻨﺴﻮخ ﻟﻪ ﻧﻔﺲ اﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪات و اﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎت آﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﺸﺮوع اﻷﺻﻠﻲ.‬ ‫5- ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ رﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ أﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Yes‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ رواﺑﻂ اﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﺎت إﻟﻰ اﻟﻤﺸﺮوع اﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 71(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 71‬ ‫6- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Close‬ﻟﺘﻐﻠﻖ ﺻﻨﺪوق ﺣﻮار اﻟـ ‪.Project Management‬‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ‪.Lesson-2.dwg‬‬ ‫7- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ ،File‬اﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Open‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Open Drawing: Project Based‬‬ ‫8- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Project Name‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ ،TutorialC‬و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Select Project Drawing‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Lesson-2.dwg‬ﺛﻢ‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) OK‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 81(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 81‬ ‫- 61 -‬
  • 15. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺿﻮاﺑﻂ إﻋﺪادات اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ‪Changing Drawing Setup Parameters‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﻮف ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﻘـﻴﺎس اﻟﺮﺳﻢ اﻷﻓﻘﻲ و ﺳﺘﺮى آﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﺮ ارﺗﻔﺎع اﻟﻨﺺ، ﻓﻲ هــﺬﻩ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻣﻘـﻴﺎس اﻟﺮﺳﻢ اﻷﻓــــﻘﻲ هـــﻮ‬ ‫005:1، و وﺣﺪة ارﺗﻔﺎع اﻟﻨﺺ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺴﻖ ‪ 2MM‬ﺗﺴﺎوي 1 ﻓﻲ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ، و ﻣﻘﻴﺎس اﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻟﻤﻘﻴﺎس اﻟﺮﺳﻢ 005:1 هﻮ 2 و وﺣﺪات اﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻠﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ، و ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ هﺬا أن ﻧﺴﻖ اﻟﻨﺺ ‪ 2MM‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻪ ﺑﺎرﺗﻔﺎع 2 ﻣﻢ.‬ ‫1- ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﺮ اﻷواﻣﺮ ‪ Command Line‬اآﺘﺐ ‪ ST‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Text Style‬‬ ‫2- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Style Name‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ 2MM‬و ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ اﻟـ ‪ Font‬أدﺧﻞ 1 أﻣﺎم اﻟـ ‪ Height‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Apply‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪Close‬‬ ‫ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺮار )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 91(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 91‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﻘﻴﺎس اﻟﺮﺳﻢ إﻟﻰ 0001:1.‬ ‫3- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Projects‬اﺧﺘﺮ‪ Drawing Setup‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Drawing Setup‬‬ ‫4- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ Scale‬و ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Drawing Scale‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Horizontal‬اﺧﺘﺮ 0001:1 ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪OK‬‬ ‫)اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 02(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 02‬ ‫- 71 -‬
  • 16. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫5- ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﺮ اﻷواﻣﺮ ‪ Command Line‬اآﺘﺐ ‪ ST‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ Text Style‬ﻣﺮة‬ ‫أﺧﺮى.‬ ‫6- ﺗﺄآﺪ أن اﻟـ ‪ Height‬ﻟﻠﻨﺴﻖ ‪ 2MM‬هﻮ 2 ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Cancel‬ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺮار )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 12(.‬ ‫إن ﻣﻘﻴﺎس اﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻘﻴﺎس 0001:1 هﻮ 1 و وﺣﺪات اﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ هﻲ اﻟﻤﻠﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ، ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى ﺳﻴﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ هﺬا ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ اﻟﻨﺴﻖ ‪ 2MM‬ﺑﺎرﺗﻔﺎع‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻨﺺ ﻣﻘﺪارﻩ 2، ﻣﻘﻴﺎس اﻟﺮﺳﻢ اﻟﻤﻌﻴﻦ ﻟﻨﺴﻖ اﻟﻨﺺ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﻊ آﻞ أﻧﺴﺎق اﻟﺨﻄﻮط اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪Land‬‬ ‫‪.Desktop‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 12‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﺮ دﻗﺔ ﻋﺮض اﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﻴﺐ إﻟﻲ 1.‬ ‫7- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Projects‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Drawing Setup‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Drawing Setup‬‬ ‫8- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ ،Units‬و ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Display Precision‬و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Elevation‬اﺧﺘﺮ 1، ﺛﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪Samples‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻨﻤﻮذج اﻟﻤﻌﺮوض )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 22(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 22‬ ‫إن هﺬا اﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻴﻢ اﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﻴﺐ اﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ إدﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ إﺟﺮاؤﻩ و ﻻ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻴﻢ اﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﻴﺐ اﻟﻤﺪﺧﻠﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ اﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ.‬ ‫- 81 -‬
  • 17. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ اﻷﺻﻞ و زاوﻳﺔ اﻟﺪوران ﻓﻲ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ.‬ ‫9- ﻣﻦ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ Drawing Setup‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ ،Orientation‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Base Point‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫>>‪ Pick‬و اﺳﺘﺨﺪم ‪ Node Osnap‬ﻟﺘﺨﺘﺎر اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ رﻗﻢ 01.‬ ‫01- ﺑﻌﺪ اﻟﺘﻘﺎط اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ رﻗﻢ 01 ﻣﻦ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ Drawing Setup‬ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى، ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪Northing and‬‬ ‫‪ Easting‬ادﺧﻞ 0005 ﻟﻠـ ‪ Northing‬و 0005 ﻟﻠـ ‪.Easting‬‬ ‫11- ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ North Rotation‬ادﺧﻞ 0542.31 أﻣﺎم ‪ Angle‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) OK‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 32(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 32‬ ‫21- ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ رﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ، اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺮار.‬ ‫31- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Utilities‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Symbol Manager‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Symbol Manager‬‬ ‫41- ﺗﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ أن اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ‪ COGO Metric Symbols‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ ،Symbol Set‬و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Palette‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Details‬ﺛﻢ‬ ‫اﺧﺘﺮ ‪) North Arrow‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 42( ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 42‬ ‫51- ﺣﺪد ﻣﻜﺎن ﻟﻌﺮض اﺗﺠﺎﻩ اﻟﺸﻤﺎل ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﻘﺒﻞ اﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻴﺔ ‪ Magnetic‬آﻮﺻﻒ ‪.Description‬‬ ‫- 91 -‬
  • 18. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 52‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ إﻋﺪادات اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ‪Editing Drawing Settings‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﻮف ﺗﻐﻴﺮ اﻹﻋﺪادات ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ، و ﺗﺤﻔﻆ هﺬﻩ اﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮات إﻟﻰ ﻧﻤﻮذج ‪ Prototype‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻊ اﺳﺘﺨﺪاﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮة‬ ‫ﻓﻲ رﺳﻮﻣﺎت أﺧﺮى ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻠﻴﺔ.‬ ‫1- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Projects‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Edit Drawing Settings‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Edit Settings‬‬ ‫2- ﺗﺄآﺪ أن ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Program‬ﺗﻌﺮض ‪) Autodesk Land Desktop‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 62(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 62‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Settings‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Geodetic Labels‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) Edit Settings‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 62( ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق‬ ‫3-‬ ‫اﻟﺤﻮار ‪) Geodetic Annotation Settings‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 72(.‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Line Annotation‬ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﻌﻤﻮد ‪ Az‬أزل ﻋﻼﻣﺎت اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﻦ أﻣﺎم ‪ Grid‬و ‪) Ground‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 72(.‬ ‫4-‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﻌﻤﻮد ‪ Suffix‬أدﺧﻞ ‪ m‬أﻣﺎم ‪ Grid‬و ‪ Ground‬و ‪) Geodetic‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 72(.‬ ‫5-‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﻌﻤﻮد ‪ Distance Unit‬أﺧﺘﺮ ‪ METERS‬أﻣﺎم ‪ Grid‬و ‪ Ground‬و ‪) Geodetic‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 72(.‬ ‫6-‬ ‫- 02 -‬
  • 19. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 72‬ ‫7- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﺘﺮﺟﻊ إﻟﻰ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Edit Settings‬‬ ‫هﺬﻩ اﻹﻋﺪادات ‪ Settings‬ﺗﻄﺒﻖ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ، ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺤﻔﻈﻬﺎ إﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻧﻤﻮذج ‪ Prototype‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ اﺳﺘﺨﺪاﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫رﺳﻮﻣﺎت أﺧﺮى ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻠﻴﺔ.‬ ‫8- ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Selected Item‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) Save to Prototype‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 62( ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪Select‬‬ ‫‪) Prototype‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 82(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 82‬ ‫9- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Select Prototype‬أﺧﺘﺮ )‪) DEFAULT (METERS‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 82( ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﺘﺮﺟﻊ إﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ Edit Settings‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Close‬‬ ‫- 12 -‬
  • 20. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫اﻟﺪرس اﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ: اﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻊ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ‪Lesson 3: Working with Point Objects‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺜﻴﻞ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ ،Land Desktop‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮن ﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﻣﻮﺟﻮدة ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ أو ﻧﻘﺎط ﻣﻘﺘﺮﺣﺔ، و ﻳﻤﻜﻦ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺗﻤﺜﻴﻞ هﺬﻩ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط‬ ‫ﻓﻲ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ و آﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻔﺎﻋﻠﻬﻢ ﻣﻊ أواﻣﺮ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ اﻟـ ‪ AutoCAD‬ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ إﻋﺪادات اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ‪.Point Settings‬‬ ‫ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﻓﻲ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ:‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ إﻇﻬﺎر اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﺑﻤﻨﺎﺳﻴﺒﻬﺎ اﻟﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ أو ﻳﻤﻜﻦ إﻇﻬﺎرهﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﻨﺴﻮب ﻣﺤﺪد و ﺛﺎﺑﺖ.‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط إﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﻋﺪة ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﺧﺎرﺟﻴﺔ ‪ External Database‬و ﻟﻴﺲ داﺧﻞ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ.‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﻨﻘﺎط ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺤﺪدهﺎ ‪ Markers‬و ﻧﺺ ‪ Text‬و آﻼهﻤﺎ ﻟﻪ ﻧﺴﻘـﻪ اﻟﺨﺎص ﺑﻪ و اﻟﺬي ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻪ، و ﻳﻤﻜﻦ أﻳﻀﺎ إﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ ‪ Label‬ﻟﻠﻨﻘﺎط ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟـ ‪.Label Style‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻘﺎس ﻇﻬﻮر ﻋﻼﻣﺎت اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ‪ Markers‬و اﻟﻨﺺ ‪ Text‬داﺧﻞ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻧﺴﺒﻴﺔ ‪ Relative‬أو ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺔ أو ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ‪.Absolute‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ اﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ اﻟﻨﺺ ‪ Text‬و اﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ Marker‬اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ اﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻘﺎﺑﺾ ‪ ،Grip Editing‬و‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬﻩ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﻳﻨﺸﺄ ﺳﻬﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ آﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ إﻟﻰ ﻣﻜﺎن اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 92 و ﻻﺣﻆ اﻟﻔﺮق ﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ 1 و ﻧﻘﻄﺔ 2(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 92‬ ‫وﺻﻒ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ‪ Point Descriptions‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮن ﺧﺎم ‪ Raw‬أو ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮن آﺎﻣﻼ ‪ ) Full‬آﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﻓﻲ اﻟـ‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪ Description Key‬ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ(.‬ ‫إن اﻟﻨﺺ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ‪ Layer‬آﻤﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎت ‪ Marker‬و ﻟﻜﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺪادات ‪Settings‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻔﺮدة.‬ ‫إﺣﺪاﺛﻴﺎت اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺎدﻳﻖ اﻟﺤﻮار داﺧﻞ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪهﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ هﻴﺌﺔ ‪ Northing/Easting‬أو‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪ Easting/Northing‬أو ‪ X,Y‬أو ‪.Y,X‬‬ ‫أﻣﺮ ‪ UNDO‬و هﻮ إﺣﺪى أواﻣﺮ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ اﻟـ ‪ AutoCAD‬ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻊ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط.‬ ‫•‬ ‫اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﺗﻨﺤﺎز أو ﺗﺼﻄﻒ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻈﺎم ‪.World UCS‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ هﺬا اﻟﺪرس:‬ ‫1- ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Land Desktop‬‬ ‫2- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ File‬أﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Open‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Open Drawing: Project Based‬‬ ‫إن اﻟﻤﺴﺎر اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻤﺸﺮوع ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﺴﺎر 6002 ‪ C:Land Projects‬ﻓﺈن آﻨﺖ ﻗﺪ ﻏﻴﺮت هﺬا اﻟﻤﺴﺎر أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺼﻴﺐ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻓﻴﺠﺐ أن ﺗﻀﻊ ذﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ اﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎر.‬ ‫3- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Project Name‬اﺧﺘﺮ 2‪ TUTORIAL‬و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Select Project Drawing‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪Lesson-3.dwg‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫4- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Projects‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Workspaces‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Land Desktop‬ﻟﺘﻌﺮض ﻗﻮاﺋﻢ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Land Desktop‬‬ ‫اﺳﺘﻌﺮاض اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ‪Listing Point Objects‬‬ ‫إن اﻟﻨﻘﺎط اﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮدة ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺳﻢ هﻤﺎ 742 و 857، اﺳﺘﺨﺪم أﻣﺮ ‪ List‬و هﻮ إﺣﺪى أواﻣﺮ اﻟـ ‪ AutoCAD‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض اﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ 742.‬ ‫- 22 -‬
  • 21. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫1- ادﺧﻞ ‪ List‬ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﺮ اﻷواﻣﺮ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ 742 ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪) Enter‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 03(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 03‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻼﺣﻆ أن اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﺒﺎرة ﻋﻦ آﺎﺋﻦ ‪ AECC_POINT‬و ﻟﻴﺴﺖ آﻨﻘﺎط ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ اﻟـ ‪ ،AutoCAD‬و إن اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﻤﻨﺴﻮﺑﻬﺎ اﻟﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ، آﻤﺎ أن إﺣﺪاﺛﻴﺎت اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ و وﺻﻔﻬﺎ و رﻗﻤﻬﺎ و اﺳﻤﻬﺎ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﻴﻦ داﺧﻞ ﻗﺎﻋﺪة اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت.‬ ‫2- أﻏﻠﻖ اﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬة.‬ ‫إدراج ﻧﻘﺎط ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﻋﺪة ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ‪Inserting Points from the Point Database‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺴﺢ أو إزاﻟﺔ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﻣﻦ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ و ﻟﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﺗﻈﻞ ﻣﻮﺟﻮدة داﺧﻞ ﻗﺎﻋﺪة اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت، ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﻤﺴﺢ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﻴﻦ 742 و 857 و إﻋﺎدة إدراﺟﻬﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى إﻟﻰ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ.‬ ‫1- اآﺘﺐ ‪ Erase‬ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﺮ اﻷواﻣﺮ ‪ Command Line‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﻴﻦ 742 و 857 ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ Enter‬ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى.‬ ‫2- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Points‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Point Utilities‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪.Quick View‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 13‬ ‫3- ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺎت ‪ X‬ﻓﻲ أﻣﺎآﻦ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ إزاﻟﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 13(.‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض آﻞ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط داﺧﻞ ﻗﺎﻋﺪة اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت.‬ ‫4- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Points‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ List Points‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.List Points‬‬ ‫5- اﺧﺘﺮ ‪.List All Points‬‬ ‫6- اﺳﺘﻌﺮض اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﺘﺸﺎهﺪ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﻴﻦ 742 و 857.‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻼﺣﻆ أن اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ 742 ﻣﻌﺮوﺿﺔ آـ ‪ 247L‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ أﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻐﻠﻘﺔ أو ﻣﺤﻤﻴﺔ ‪ Locked‬و ﻓﻲ هﺬﻩ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮهﺎ ‪) Unlocked‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 23(.‬ ‫- 32 -‬
  • 22. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 23‬ ‫7- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺮار.‬ ‫8- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ View‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Named Views‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ View‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ 1 ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺖ ‪ Named‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ Set Current‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪) OK‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 33(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 33‬ ‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪم اﻟﺨﻄﻮة اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻹدراج اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﻴﻦ إﻟﻰ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﻋﺪة اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت.‬ ‫9- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Points‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Insert Points to Drawing‬ﺛﻢ اآﺘﺐ ‪ W‬ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎر ‪ Window‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻬﺎ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﺎن ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ )ﺗﻘﻊ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﺎن ﻓﻲ اﻟﻨﺼﻒ اﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ(.‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻼﺣﻆ ﻇﻬﻮر اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﺎن ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 43(.‬ ‫- 42 -‬
  • 23. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 43‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﻴﺐ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ‪Changing Point Elevations‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﻮف ﺗﻘﻮم ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ اﻟﻤﻨﺴﻮب اﻟﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ إﻟﻰ ﻣﻨﺴﻮب ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻟﻠﻨﻘﺎط اﻟﻤﺪرﺟﺔ.‬ ‫1- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Points‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Point Settings‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Point Settings‬‬ ‫2- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ Insert‬و ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Insertion Elevation‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Fixed elevation‬و ﺗﺄآﺪ أن اﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ أﻣﺎم ‪Fixed‬‬ ‫‪ Elevation‬هﻲ 0 )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 53(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 53‬ ‫3- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ ،Text‬و اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Automatic Leaders‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪) OK‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 63(.‬ ‫- 52 -‬
  • 24. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 63‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮة اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻌﺮض ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ و ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ اﻟﻤﻨﺴﻮب.‬ ‫4- ادﺧﻞ ‪ List‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ رﻗﻢ 857 ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Enter‬ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى.‬ ‫آﻤﺎ ﺗﺮى ﻓﻲ اﻟﺸﻜﻞ 73 ﻓﻤﺎزال اﻟـ ‪ Marker Location‬ﻳﻌﺮض .‪ ،245.51 m‬ﻓﺈﻋﺪادات اﻟﻨﻘﺎط اﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﻬﺎ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط اﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮدة ﻓﻲ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ و ﻟﻜﻦ ﻳﺠﺐ إﻋﺎدة إدراج هﺬﻩ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط أو إﺟﺮاء اﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻟﻴﺘﻢ اﻟﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﻨﺴﻮب.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 73‬ ‫5- أﻏﻠﻖ اﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬة.‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻹدراج اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﺎن ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى.‬ ‫6- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Points‬اﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Insert Points to Drawing‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﻘﺒﻞ اﻟﺨﻴﺎر اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ‪ Window‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺎن اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﻴﻦ 742 و 857 ﻹﻋﺎدة إدراﺟﻬﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ.‬ ‫7- ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ رﺳﺎﻟﺔ ‪ Point in Drawing‬اﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ‪) Replace All‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 83(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 83‬ ‫- 62 -‬
  • 25. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫8- ادﺧﻞ ‪ List‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ 857 ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Enter‬ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى.‬ ‫آﻤﺎ ﺗﺮى ﻓﻲ اﻟﺸﻜﻞ 93 ﻓﺎﻟـ ‪ Marker Location‬اﻵن ﻳﻌﺮض .‪.0 m‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 93‬ ‫9- أﻏﻠﻖ اﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬة.‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﻋﺮض اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ‪Changing Point Display Properties‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺪرس ﺳﻮف ﻧﻠﻘﻲ ﻧﻈﺮة ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﻋﺮض اﻟﻨﻘﺎط.‬ ‫1- اﺧﺘﺮ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ رﻗﻢ 857، ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﻐﻄﺔ ﻳﻤﻨﻰ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﺄرة )‪ (Right click with the mouse‬و اﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪Display‬‬ ‫‪ Properties‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Point Display Properties‬‬ ‫2- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ Reset‬و ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Point Elevation‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Reset Point Elevation in Drawing‬و أﻳﻀﺎ‬ ‫اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Actual Elevation‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪) OK‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 04(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 04‬ ‫3- ادﺧﻞ ‪ List‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ آﻼ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﻴﻦ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 14(.‬ ‫- 72 -‬
  • 26. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 14‬ ‫ﻣﻦ اﻟﺸﻜﻞ 14 ﺳﺘﻼﺣﻆ أن اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ 857 أﺻﺒﺢ ﻣﻨﺴﻮب ﻋﻼﻣﺘﻬﺎ ‪ The Marker‬هﻮ اﻟﻤﻨﺴﻮب اﻟﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻟﻠﻨﻘﻄﺔ و هﻮ .‪ 245.51 m‬و أن‬ ‫اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ 742 ﻣﺎزال ﻣﻨﺴﻮﺑﻬﺎ .‪ ،0 m‬إن اﻟﺘﻐﻴﺮات اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ اﻟﻌﺮض ﻟﻜﻞ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻓﻮري و ﻻ ﻳﻠﺰم إﻋﺎدة إدراج‬ ‫اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ.‬ ‫4- أﻏﻠﻖ اﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬة.‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ و اﻟﻨﺺ ‪Changing Point Markers and Text‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ اﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎت أو اﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎت اﻟﻤﺼﻤﻤﺔ داﺧﻞ اﻟـ ‪ ،AutoCAD‬ﻟﻮ ﻗﺮرت اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻧﻘﺎط اﻟـ ‪ AutoCAD‬آﻌﻼﻣﺎت‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﺴﻖ اﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎت ‪ Marker Style‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻷﻣﺮ ‪.Ddptype‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﻮف ﺗﺨﺘﺎر ﻋﻼﻣﺔ أﺧﺮى و ﺗﺮآﺐ رﻣﺰ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺛﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻲ هﺬﻩ اﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ.‬ ‫1- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ View‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Named Views‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ View‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ 3 ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺖ ‪ Named‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ Set Current‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫2- اﺧﺘﺮ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ رﻗﻢ 857 ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر اﻟﻔﺄرة اﻷﻳﻤﻦ و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Display Properties‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق‬ ‫اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Point Display Properties‬‬ ‫3- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ Marker‬و ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Custom Marker Symbol‬اﺧﺘﺮ رﻣﺰ اﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ اﻟﺮاﺑﻌﺔ ﺛﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ‬ ‫‪ Superimposed‬اﺧﺘﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ اﻟﺪاﺋﺮة ‪) Circle Symbol‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 24(.‬ ‫4- ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Custom Marker Size‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Size in Absolute Units‬ﺛﻢ ادﺧﻞ اﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ 2 أﻣﺎم اﻟـ ‪) Size‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 24(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 24‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ أﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻇﻬﻮر و ﻟﻮن رﻗﻢ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ و اﻟﻤﻨﺴﻮب و أﻳﻀﺎ اﻟﻮﺻﻒ.‬ ‫- 82 -‬
  • 27. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻹﺧﻔﺎء ﻇﻬﻮر اﻟﻤﻨﺴﻮب و ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻮن وﺻﻒ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ و ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ اﻟﻨﺺ إﻟﻰ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ.‬ ‫5- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ Text‬ﺛﻢ و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Color and Visibility‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈزاﻟﺔ اﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﻣﻦ أﻣﺎم اﻟﺼﻒ ‪ Elevation‬و اﻟﻌﻤﻮد‬ ‫?‪) Visible‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 34(.‬ ‫6- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻠﻮن ﻣﻦ أﻣﺎم ‪ Description‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ Select a Color‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻠﻮن، ﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻠﻮن ‪) Cyan‬أزرق ﻓﺎﺗﺢ( ﻣﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ اﻷﻟﻮان اﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ Standard Colors Palette‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪OK‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺮﺟﻊ إﻟﻰ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Point Display Properties‬‬ ‫آﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ أﻳﻀﺎ إدﺧﺎل رﻗﻢ اﻟﻠﻮن ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮة ﻓﺈذا ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈدﺧﺎل اﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ 4 ﻓﻲ اﻟﺼﻨﺪوق اﻟﻤﺠﺎور ﻟﺼﻨﺪوق اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻠﻮن ﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ اﻟﻠﻮن إﻟﻲ اﻟﻠﻮن‬ ‫‪) Cyan‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 34(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 34‬ ‫7- ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Style and Size‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Absolute Units‬و ادﺧﻞ اﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ 2 أﻣﺎم اﻟـ ‪) Text Size‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 34( ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫اﻧﻈﺮ ﻟﻠﻨﻘﻄﺔ 857 ﺳﺘﺠﺪ أن ﻋﻼﻣﺔ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ و ﻣﻘﺎس اﻟﻨﺺ ﻳﻈﻬﺮان ﺑﺤﺠﻢ أﺻﻐﺮ و أن رﻗﻢ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ و اﻟﻮﺻﻒ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻌﻼﻣﺔ، ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ 742 ﻣﺎزاﻟﺖ آﻤﺎ هﻲ ﺑﻼ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻣﻘﺎس اﻟﻨﺺ و اﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻄﺎن ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ اﻟﻤﺮﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬ ‫44(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 44‬ ‫- 92 -‬
  • 28. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫آﻠﻤﺎ ﺻﻐﺮت أو آﺒﺮت اﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ اﻟﻤﻌﺮوﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪ Zoom in or out‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺳﺘﺠﺪ أن ﻣﻘﺎس اﻟﻨﺺ و ﻋﻼﻣﺔ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط اﻟﻤﺮﺗﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺎﺳﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ اﻟﻤﻌﺮوﺿﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮان ﺑﺘﻐﻴﺮ اﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ اﻟﻤﻌﺮوﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )ﻳﺠﺐ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻷﻣﺮ ‪ Regen‬إن‬ ‫آﻨﺖ ﺗﻘﻮم ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ و اﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﺒﻜﺮة اﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮدة ﺑﺎﻟﻔﺄرة ‪.(Mouse Scroll‬‬ ‫8- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Points‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Point Settings‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Point Settings‬‬ ‫9- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ Preferences‬و ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Point Display‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈزاﻟﺔ اﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﻣﻦ أﻣﺎم ‪Always Regenerate‬‬ ‫‪ Point Display After Zoom‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) OK‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 54(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 54‬ ‫01- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ View‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Named Views‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ View‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ 1 ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺖ ‪ Named‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ Set Current‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫11- ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﺮ اﻷواﻣﺮ اآﺘﺐ ‪ Regen‬ﻹﻋﺎدة ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ.‬ ‫اﻵن ﺳﺘﺠﺪ أن ﻣﻘﺎس اﻟﻨﺺ و اﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﻨﻘﻄﺔ 742 ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮان ﺗﺒﻌﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ اﻟﻤﻌﺮوﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻷﻣﺮ ‪ Regen‬و ﻟﻴﺲ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ 857 ﺗﺒﻘﻲ آﻤﺎ هﻲ ﺑﻤﻘﺎﺳﻬﺎ اﻟﻤﺤﺪد ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ ‪.Absolute Size‬‬ ‫ﻟﻮ آﺎﻧﺖ آﻞ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط أو ﻋﺪد آﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ‪ Absolute Size‬ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮض ﻋﻼﻣﺘﻬﺎ و ﻧﺼﻬﺎ ﻓﻴﻔﻀﻞ ﻏﻠﻖ اﻟﺨﺎﺻﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ Always Regenerate Point Display After Zoom‬آﻤﺎ ﺗﻢ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺤﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ أداء أﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻠﻌﺮض.‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻹﻋﺎدة ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ اﻟﻨﺺ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ‪Point Marker‬‬ ‫21- أﺧﺘﺮ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ رﻗﻢ 742 ﻟﺘﻌﺮض ﻗﺎﺑﺾ اﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ‪.Grips‬‬ ‫31- ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ اﻟﻘﺎﺑﺾ ﻧﺤﻮ اﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ اﻷﻳﻤﻦ اﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ.‬ ‫ﺳﺘﺠﺪ ﻇﻬﻮر ﺳﻬﻢ آﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ اﻟﻨﺺ و اﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 64(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 64‬ ‫- 03 -‬
  • 29. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮض اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺎت ‪Controlling Point Display by Layer‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻃﺒﻘﺔ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ‪ The Point Layer‬ﺛﻢ ﺗﻘﻮم ﺑﺘﻌﻄﻴﻞ ‪ Turn Off‬هﺬﻩ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ.‬ ‫1- اﺧﺘﺮ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ رﻗﻢ 742 ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر اﻟﻔﺄرة اﻷﻳﻤﻦ و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ أﻣﺎﻣﻚ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪Edit Object Display‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪) Object Display‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 74(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 74‬ ‫2- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) Layer‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 74( ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Select Layer‬‬ ‫3- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Layer‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪) PNT_MISC‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 84( ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﺘﺮﺟﻊ إﻟﻰ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪Object‬‬ ‫‪ Display‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 84‬ ‫4- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ أﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺎت ﻣﻦ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ اﻷدوات ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ Layer Properties Manager‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻄﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﺮض اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ‪) PNT_MISC‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 94( ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﺘﻐﻠﻖ اﻟـ ‪.Layer Properties Manager‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 94‬ ‫- 13 -‬
  • 30. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫اﻟﺪرس اﻟﺮاﺑﻊ: إﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﻘﺎط ‪Lesson 4:Creating Points‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺪرس ﺳﺘﺘﻌﻠﻢ إﻧﺸﺎء اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﻳﺪوﻳﺎ ﺑﺈدﺧﺎل اﻹﺣﺪاﺛﻲ اﻟﺸﻤﺎﻟﻲ و اﻟﺸﺮﻗﻲ ‪ Northing and Easting‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﻮل ﺧﻂ اﻧﺤﻴﺎز‬ ‫‪ Alignment‬أو ﺑﻨﺎء ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﻢ اﻟﺴﻄﺢ ‪ ،Surface Features‬و أﻳﻀﺎ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام أواﻣﺮ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ و ﻏﻠﻖ ‪ Lock‬اﻟﻨﻘﺎط و اآﺘﺸﺎف‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻌﺎرض ﺑﻴﻦ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﻓﻲ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ و ﻗﺎﻋﺪة اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت.‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ هﺬا اﻟﺪرس:‬ ‫1- ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Land Desktop‬‬ ‫2- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ File‬أﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Open‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Open Drawing: Project Based‬‬ ‫إن اﻟﻤﺴﺎر اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻤﺸﺮوع ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﺴﺎر 6002 ‪ C:Land Projects‬ﻓﺈن آﻨﺖ ﻗﺪ ﻏﻴﺮت هﺬا اﻟﻤﺴﺎر أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺼﻴﺐ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻓﻴﺠﺐ أن ﺗﻀﻊ ذﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ اﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎر.‬ ‫3- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Project Name‬اﺧﺘﺮ 2‪ TUTORIAL‬و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Select Project Drawing‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪Lesson-4.dwg‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫4- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Projects‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Workspaces‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Land Desktop‬ﻟﺘﻌﺮض ﻗﻮاﺋﻢ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Land Desktop‬‬ ‫إﻧﺸﺎء اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﻳﺪوﻳﺎ ‪Creating Points Manually‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ إﻋﺪادات اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ رﻗﻢ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﺒﺪء ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط و إدﺧﺎل اﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﻴﺐ ﻳﺪوﻳﺎ.‬ ‫1- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ View‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Named Views‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ View‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ 1 ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺖ ‪ Named‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ Set Current‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫2- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Points‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Point Settings‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Point Settings‬‬ ‫3- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ Create‬و ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Numbering‬أدﺧﻞ اﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ 01 أﻣﺎم ‪) Current number‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 05(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 05‬ ‫4- ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ اﻟـ ‪ Elevations‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Manual‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﺸﺊ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﺮآﻦ اﻷﻳﻤﻦ اﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﺒﻨﻰ و ﻣﻨﺴﻮﺑﻬﺎ .‪.249 m‬‬ ‫5- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Points‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Create Points‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪.Manual‬‬ ‫6- ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ‪ Endpoint Osnap‬اﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻜﺎن اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﺮآﻦ اﻷﻳﻤﻦ اﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﺒﻨﻰ.‬ ‫7- أدﺧﻞ 942 ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺴﻮب ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Enter‬‬ ‫8- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Points‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Point Settings‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Point Settings‬‬ ‫9- ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ اﻟـ ‪ Descriptions‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Manual‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) OK‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 15(.‬ ‫- 23 -‬
  • 31. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 15‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﺸﺊ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﺮآﻦ اﻷﻳﻤﻦ اﻟﻌﻠﻮي و ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﻨﺴﻮب .‪ 249 m‬و ﺑﻮﺻﻒ هﻮ ‪.BLDG‬‬ ‫01- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Points‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Create Points‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪.Manual‬‬ ‫11- ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ‪ Endpoint Osnap‬اﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻜﺎن اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﺮآﻦ اﻷﻳﻤﻦ اﻟﻌﻠﻮي ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﺒﻨﻰ.‬ ‫21- ادﺧﻞ ‪ BLDG‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻒ و ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺴﻮب اﻗﺒﻞ اﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻴﺔ .‪ 249 m‬و اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) Enter‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 25(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 25‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﺴﻮب و وﺻﻒ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪Specifying Automatic Elevations and Descriptions‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﻮف ﺗﺴﺘﻜﻤﻞ إدراج اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﺑﻤﻨﺴﻮب و وﺻﻒ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ.‬ ‫1- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Points‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Point Settings‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Point Settings‬‬ ‫2- ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ Create‬و ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ اﻟـ ‪ Elevation‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪.Automatic‬‬ ‫3- ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ اﻟـ ‪ Descriptions‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Automatic‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) OK‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 35(.‬ ‫- 33 -‬
  • 32. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 35‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﺸﺊ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﺮآﻦ اﻷﻳﺴﺮ اﻟﻌﻠﻮي ﻟﻠﻤﺒﻨﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﻨﺴﻮب 942 و ﺑﻮﺻﻒ ‪.BLDG‬‬ ‫4- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Points‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Create Points‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪.Manual‬‬ ‫5- ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ‪ Endpoint Osnap‬اﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻜﺎن اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﺮآﻦ اﻷﻳﺴﺮ اﻟﻌﻠﻮي ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﺒﻨﻰ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Enter‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ إدراج اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﺮآﻦ اﻟﻤﺤﺪد ﺑﻤﻨﺴﻮب .‪ 249 m‬و ﺑﻮﺻﻒ ‪ BLDG‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 45(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 45‬ ‫إﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﻘﺎط داﺧﻞ ﻗﺎﻋﺪة اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت ‪Creating Points in the Points Database‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻐﻴﺮ إﻋﺪادات اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ‪ Point Settings‬ﻟﺘﻨﺸﺊ ﻧﻘﺎط داﺧﻞ ﻗﺎﻋﺪة اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت دون إدراﺟﻬﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ إﻟﻰ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ، ﺛﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﺊ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪة.‬ ‫1- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Points‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Point Settings‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Point Settings‬‬ ‫2- ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ Create‬و ﻓﻲ اﻟﻘﺴﻢ ‪ Numbering‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎء اﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﻣﻦ أﻣﺎم ‪ Insert to Drawing as Created‬ﺛﻢ‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) OK‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 55(.‬ ‫- 43 -‬
  • 33. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 55‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ هﺬﻩ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات ﻟﺘﻨﺸﺊ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ رآﻦ اﻟﻤﺒﻨﻰ اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ.‬ ‫3- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Points‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Create Points‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪.Manual‬‬ ‫4- ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ‪ Endpoint Osnap‬اﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻜﺎن اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﺮآﻦ اﻷﻳﺴﺮ اﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﺒﻨﻰ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Enter‬‬ ‫اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ اﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪة ﻻ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ، اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎدة اﻹﻋﺪادات ﻟﻴﺘﻢ إدراج اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ، و إدراج ﺁﺧﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎﺋﻬﺎ.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 65‬ ‫5- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Points‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Point Settings‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Point Settings‬‬ ‫6- ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ Create‬و ﻓﻲ اﻟﻘﺴﻢ ‪ Numbering‬اﺧﺘﺮ‪ Insert to Drawing as Created‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) OK‬اﻧﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 55(.‬ ‫7- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Points‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Insert Points to Drawing‬ﺛﻢ أدﺧﻞ ‪ N‬ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎر ‪ Number‬ﺛﻢ ادﺧﻞ 31 ﻟﺮﻗﻢ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ.‬ ‫ﺳﺘﺠﺪ اﻵن أن اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﺮآﻦ اﻷﻳﺴﺮ اﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﺒﻨﻰ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 75(.‬ ‫- 53 -‬
  • 34. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 75‬ ‫إﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﻘﺎط ﻋﻠﻰ آﺎﺋﻦ ‪Placing Points on an Object‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﻘﺎط ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺮآﻨﻴﻦ اﻟﺒﺎﻗﻴﺎن ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﺒﻨﻰ.‬ ‫1- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Points‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Create Points‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪.Automatic‬‬ ‫2- اﺧﺘﺮ اﻟﺨﻂ اﻟﻌﻤﻮدي اﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ اﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﺒﻨﻲ ﺛﻢ أﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) Enter‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 85(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 85‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ إﻧﺸﺎء اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﺎن ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ اﻟﺒﺪاﻳﺔ و اﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﻂ.‬ ‫إﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﻘﺎط ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﻮل ﺧﻂ اﻧﺤﻴﺎز ‪Placing Points Along an Alignment‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﻘﺎط ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﻮل ﺧﻂ اﻧﺤﻴﺎز ‪ Alignment‬ﻣﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺤﻄﺎت ‪ Stations‬ﻣﺤﺪدة و ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺎت ﻓﺎﺻﻠﺔ‬ ‫‪ ،Offset‬أوﻻ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺛﻢ أﺧﺘﺮ اﻟـ ‪ Alignment‬اﻟﻨﺸﻂ أو اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ.‬ ‫- 63 -‬
  • 35. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫1- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ View‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Named Views‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ View‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ 2 ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺖ ‪ Named‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ Set Current‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫2- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Alignment‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Set Current Alignment‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار‬ ‫‪.Alignment Librarian‬‬ ‫3- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟـ ‪ Selection‬اﺧﺘﺮ 96‪ P3_HWY‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) OK‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 95(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 95‬ ‫4- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Points‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Create Points – Alignments‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪.Measure Alignment‬‬ ‫5- أدﺧﻞ 00551 ﻟﻤﺤﻄﺔ اﻟﺒﺪء ‪ Beginning Station‬ﺛﻢ أدﺧﻞ 00061 ﻟﻤﺤﻄﺔ اﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ‪.Ending Station‬‬ ‫6- أدﺧﻞ 51 ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻓﺎت اﻟﻔﺎﺻﻠﺔ ‪ ،Offset‬و ادﺧﻞ 05 ﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ اﻟﻤﺤﻄﺎت ‪ Station Interval‬ﺛﻢ ادﺧﻞ 52 ﻟﺮﻗﻢ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ.‬ ‫ﺳﺘﺮي 11 ﻧﻘﻄﺔ أﻧﺸﺌﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﻮل اﻟﺨﻂ اﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 06(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 06‬ ‫إﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﻘﺎط ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ‪Placing Points on a Surface‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﻘﺎط ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ اﻷرض اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ و ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻧﻤﻮذج ﺷﺒﻜﻲ ﻟﻤﻮاﺿﻊ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط.‬ ‫1- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ View‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Named Views‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ View‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ 3 ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺖ ‪ Named‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ Set Current‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ اﻟﺴﻄﺢ ‪ EG‬و ﺟﻌﻠﻪ اﻟﺴﻄﺢ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ.‬ ‫- 73 -‬
  • 36. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫2- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Set Current Surface‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Select Surface‬‬ ‫3- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Select surface to open‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ EG‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) OK‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 06(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 16‬ ‫4- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Points‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Create Points – Surface‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪.On Grid‬‬ ‫5- اﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﻘﺒﻞ اﻟﺰاوﻳﺔ اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻴﺔ )و هﻲ 0( ﻟﺪوران اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ.‬ ‫6- ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ‪ Intersection Osnap‬اﺧﺘﺮ اﻟﺮآﻦ اﻷﻳﺴﺮ اﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ.‬ ‫7- أدﺧﻞ 05 آﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺎت اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻓﻲ اﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ‪ (Grid X Spacing) X‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﻘﺒﻞ اﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻴﺔ )05(‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺎت اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻓﻲ اﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ‪.(Grid Y spacing) Y‬‬ ‫8- ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ‪ Intersection Osnap‬اﺧﺘﺮ اﻟﺮآﻦ اﻷﻳﻤﻦ اﻟﻌﻠﻮي ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ.‬ ‫9- اﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﻘﺒﻞ اﻟﺨﻴﺎر اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ‪ No‬ﻟـ ‪ Change the size or rotation of the grid/grid squares‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺎس اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ أو زاوﻳﺔ دوراﻧﻬﺎ.‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻘﺎط اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ اﻟﻤﺤﺪدة ﺑﻤﻨﺎﺳﻴﺐ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺒﻄﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺴﻄﺢ اﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪم )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 26(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 26‬ ‫- 83 -‬
  • 37. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫اﻟﺪرس اﻟﺨﺎﻣﺲ: ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ‪Lesson5: Editing Points‬‬ ‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪم اﻷﻣﺮ ‪ Point Editing‬ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ أرﻗﺎم اﻟﻨﻘﺎط و إﺣﺪاﺛﻴﺎﺗﻬﺎ و اﻟﻮﺻﻒ.‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ هﺬا اﻟﺪرس:‬ ‫1- ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Land Desktop‬‬ ‫2- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ File‬أﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Open‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Open Drawing: Project Based‬‬ ‫إن اﻟﻤﺴﺎر اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻤﺸﺮوع ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﺴﺎر 6002 ‪ C:Land Projects‬ﻓﺈن آﻨﺖ ﻗﺪ ﻏﻴﺮت هﺬا اﻟﻤﺴﺎر أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺼﻴﺐ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻓﻴﺠﺐ أن ﺗﻀﻊ ذﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ اﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎر.‬ ‫3- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Project Name‬اﺧﺘﺮ 2‪ TUTORIAL‬و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Select Project Drawing‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪Lesson-5.dwg‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫4- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Projects‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Workspaces‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Land Desktop‬ﻟﺘﻌﺮض ﻗﻮاﺋﻢ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Land Desktop‬‬ ‫اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ‪Selecting Points to Edit‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻧﻘﺎط ﻣﻦ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ.‬ ‫1- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ View‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Named Views‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ View‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ 1 ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺖ ‪ Named‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ Set Current‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪OK‬‬ ‫2- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Points‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Edit Points‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Edit Points‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪Edit‬‬ ‫‪.Points‬‬ ‫3- اﺧﺘﺮ ‪) Enable Filtering‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 36(.‬ ‫4- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪) Include‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 36(.‬ ‫5- ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ With Number Matching‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) Selection Set in Drawing‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 36(.‬ ‫6- أدﺧﻞ ‪ W‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﺧﻴﺎر اﻟـ ‪ Window‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﺜﻼث ﻧﻘﺎط 742 و 842 و 857 ﻣﻦ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Enter‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 36‬ ‫- 93 -‬
  • 38. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫7- ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ Edit Points‬ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى، ﺗﺄآﺪ أن اﻟﻨﻘﺎط اﻟﺜﻼث ﻳﻈﻬﺮوا اﻵن داﺧﻞ اﻟﺨﺎﻧﺔ أﻣﺎم ‪With Number‬‬ ‫‪) Matching‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 46(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 46‬ ‫8- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) Build List‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 46( ﻟﺘﺒﻨﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻘﺎط اﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎرة ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ.‬ ‫9- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪) Edit‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 56(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 56‬ ‫- 04 -‬
  • 39. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ رﻗﻢ 742 ﻣﺤﻤﻴﺔ ‪ Locked‬و ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ ، و ﻟﻜﻦ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﺎن اﻷﺧﺮﻳﺎن ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﻤﺎ، و ﻟﻜﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ اﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺳﺘﺨﺮج ﻣﻦ ﺻﻨﺪوق‬ ‫اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ Edit Points‬ﻹزاﻟﺔ اﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ‪ Unlock‬ﻋﻦ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ 742.‬ ‫01- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺮار.‬ ‫إزاﻟﺔ اﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻦ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ‪Unlocking Points‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﺰﻳﻞ اﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ‪ Unlock‬ﻋﻦ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ 742 ﺛﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ اﻟﻮﺻﻒ و ﻗﻴﻤﺔ اﻹﺣﺪاﺛﻲ ﻓﻲ اﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ‪.X‬‬ ‫1- ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Points‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Lock/Unlock Points‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪.Unlock Points‬‬ ‫2- أدﺧﻞ ‪ S‬ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎر ‪ Selection‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ رﻗﻢ 742 ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Enter‬‬ ‫اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ رﻗﻢ 742 اﻵن ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺤﻤﻴﺔ و ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ.‬ ‫3- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Points‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Edit Points‬ﺛﻢ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Edit Points‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪Edit‬‬ ‫‪. Points‬‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﻨﻘﺎط اﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎرة ﺳﺘﻌﺮض ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ، اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ اﻟﻮﺻﻒ و ﻗﻴﻤﺔ اﻹﺣﺪاﺛﻲ ﻓﻲ اﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ‪ X‬ﻟﻠﻨﻘﻄﺔ 742.‬ ‫4- ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ Edit‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ 742 و ﺗﺤﺖ اﻟﻌﻤﻮد ‪ Raw Desc‬ادﺧﻞ ‪) MON‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 66(.‬ ‫5- ﺗﺤﺖ اﻟﻌﻤﻮد ‪ Easting‬ﻟﻨﻔﺲ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ أدﺧﻞ 8446.101472 )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 66(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 66‬ ‫6- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺮار.‬ ‫اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ رﻗﻢ 742 اﻵن ﻟﻬﺎ وﺻﻒ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ و ﺗﺤﺮآﺖ إﻟﻰ اﻟﻴﺴﺎر ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ 02 ﻣﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻬﺎ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 76(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 76‬ ‫- 14 -‬
  • 40. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﺎرﻧﺔ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ‪Editing Point Datum‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﻴﺐ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط اﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻘﻊ ﻣﻨﺴﻮﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ 001 و 002 ﻣﺘﺮ ﺛﻢ ﺗﻘﻮم ﺑﺮﻓﻊ ﻣﻨﺴﻮب اﻟﻨﻘﺎط اﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎرة 001 ﻣﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﻷﻋﻠﻰ.‬ ‫1- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ View‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Named Views‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ View‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ 2 ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺖ ‪ Named‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ Set Current‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫2- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Points‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Edit Points‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪.Datum‬‬ ‫3- ادﺧﻞ 001 ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﻨﺴﻮب.‬ ‫4- ادﺧﻞ ‪ D‬ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎر ‪ Dialog‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Points‬‬ ‫5- ﺗﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ‪) Enable Filtering‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 86(.‬ ‫6- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Reset‬ﻓﻲ اﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ اﻷﻳﺴﺮ اﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ﻟﺘﻤﺤﻮ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻨﻘﺎط اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ و ﺗﺨﺘﺎر ﻧﻘﺎط ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ )اﻧﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 86(.‬ ‫7- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪) Point Groups‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 86(.‬ ‫8- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎت اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ‪ Point Groups‬اﺧﺘﺮ اﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ 2‪ DAY‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Build List‬ﻓﻲ أﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻨﺪوق‬ ‫اﻟﺤﻮار)اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 86(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 86‬ ‫اﻧﻚ ﺗﺤﺘﺎج ﻓﻘﻂ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻨﻘﺎط اﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻘﻊ ﻣﻨﺴﻮﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ 001 و 002 ﻣﺘﺮ، ﻓﻲ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ اﺳﺘﺨﺪم اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ Exclude‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﺜﻨﻲ آﻞ‬ ‫اﻟﻨﻘﺎط اﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻊ ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﻨﻄﺎق.‬ ‫9- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ ،Exclude‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ With Elevation Matching‬و ﻓﻲ اﻟﺨﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﻤﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻬﺎ اآﺘﺐ 002>,001<.‬ ‫هﺬﻩ اﻟﻤﻌﺎدﻟﺔ ﺗﻘﻮم ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء اﻟﻨﻘﺎط اﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻘﻊ ﻣﻨﺴﻮﺑﻬﺎ ﺗﺤﺖ 001 ﻣﺘﺮ و ﻓﻮق 002 ﻣﺘﺮ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 96(.‬ ‫- 24 -‬
  • 41. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 96‬ ‫01- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Build List‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﺜﻨﻲ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ.‬ ‫11- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺮار.‬ ‫آﻞ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻊ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎق اﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﻴﺐ ﻣﻦ 001 إﻟﻰ 002 ﺗﻢ رﻓﻊ ﻣﻨﺴﻮﺑﻬﺎ 001 ﻣﺘﺮ.‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام أواﻣﺮ اﻟـ ‪Editing Points with AutoCAD Commands AutoCAD‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام أواﻣﺮ اﻟـ ‪ AutoCAD‬ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط، ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻋﺪا اﻷواﻣﺮ ‪ MOVE‬و ‪ ROTATE‬و ‪ ،ALIGN‬أواﻣﺮ اﻟـ ‪AutoCAD‬‬ ‫هﺬﻩ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻓﻘﻂ إن ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻔﻌﻴﻠﻬﺎ داﺧﻞ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Point Settings‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺧﻂ اﻧﺤﻴﺎز ‪ Alignment‬و ﻧﻘﺎﻃﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻷﻣﺮ ‪ ،Move‬و ﻟﻜﻦ ﻗﻢ أوﻻ ﺑﺘﻔﻌﻴﻞ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام أواﻣﺮ اﻟـ‬ ‫‪ AutoCAD‬ﻣﻊ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﻣﻦ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Point Settings‬‬ ‫1- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ View‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Named Views‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ View‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ 3 ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺖ ‪ Named‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ Set Current‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫2- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Points‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Point Settings‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Point Settings‬‬ ‫3- ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ Update‬و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ AutoCAD MOVE command‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪Allow Points to be MOVE'd in‬‬ ‫‪ Drawing‬و أﻳﻀﺎ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Update Point Database After MOVE Command‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) OK‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬ ‫07(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 07‬ ‫- 34 -‬
  • 42. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺧﻂ اﻻﻧﺤﻴﺎز ‪ Alignment‬و اﻟﻨﻘﺎط اﻟﻤﺮﺗﺒﻄﺔ ﺑﻪ، إن اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺎت ‪ Layers‬اﻷﺧﺮى ﻓﻲ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻣﻘﻔﻠﺔ أو ﻣﺤﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ Locked‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺴﻬﻞ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﺨﻂ و ﻧﻘﺎﻃﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬة ‪.window selection set‬‬ ‫4- ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﺮ اﻷواﻣﺮ اآﺘﺐ ‪ ،Move‬و اﺳﺘﺨﺪم ﺧﻴﺎر اﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬة ﻟﺘﺨﺘﺎر اﻟﺨﻂ ذو ﻟﻮن اﻟﺼﺪأ ‪ Rust‬و ﻧﻘﺎط اﻟﺨﻂ أﻳﻀﺎ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪.Enter‬‬ ‫5- ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ‪ Node Osnap‬اﺧﺘﺮ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ 101 ﻟﺘﻜﻮن ﻧﻘﻄﺔ اﻷﺳﺎس ‪ Base Point‬ﺛﻢ و ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ‪ Node Osnap‬ﻣﺮة‬ ‫أﺧﺮى اﺧﺘﺮ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ 201 ﻟﺘﻜﻮن اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ اﻟﻤﺮاد اﻟﺘﺤﺮك إﻟﻴﻬﺎ.‬ ‫6- ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ رﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ اﻟـ ‪ AutoCAD‬أﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Yes‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻗﺎﻋﺪة ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﻨﻘﺎط.‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ اﻟﺨﻂ و اﻟﻨﻘﺎط اﻟﻤﺮﺗﺒﻄﺔ ﺑﻪ آﻤﺎ ﺗﻢ أﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻗﺎﻋﺪة اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﺑﺈﺣﺪاﺛﻴﺎت اﻟﻨﻘﺎط اﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪة )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 17(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 17‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ‪Using Check Points‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﺴﺘﺨﺪم أﺣﺪ أواﻣﺮ اﻟـ ‪ AutoCAD‬و هﻮ أﻣﺮ ‪ Undo‬ﻻﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎع اﻟﺨﻂ و ﻧﻘﺎﻃﻪ إﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻬﻤﺎ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ و ﻟﻜﻦ هﺬا اﻷﻣﺮ‬ ‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﻘﻮم ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻗﺎﻋﺪة اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻘﺎط و ﻟﺬﻟﻚ اﺳﺘﺨﺪم اﻷﻣﺮ ‪ Check Points‬ﻟﺤﻞ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻨﺎﻗﺾ ﺑﻴﻦ إﺣﺪاﺛﻴﺎت اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﻓﻲ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ‬ ‫و إﺣﺪاﺛﻴﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﻋﺪة اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت.‬ ‫1- ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﺮ اﻷواﻣﺮ ادﺧﻞ ‪ Undo‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﺛﻢ ‪ Enter‬ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﻴﺪ ﺧﻂ اﻻﻧﺤﻴﺎز و ﻧﻘﺎﻃﻪ ﻟﻤﻮﺿﻌﻬﻤﺎ‬ ‫اﻷﺻﻠﻲ.‬ ‫2- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Points‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Check Points‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ‪ Modify Project‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار‬ ‫‪.Modify Project Database Points from Drawing‬‬ ‫3- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Scan Drawing for‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪) COGO Point Objects‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 27(.‬ ‫4- و ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Modify Project Database‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Change points in project database‬ﺛﻢ أﺿﻐﻂ ‪) OK‬اﻧﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 27(.‬ ‫- 44 -‬
  • 43. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 27‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﺮ اﻷواﻣﺮ ‪.Command Line‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺳﺘﻌﺮاض اﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ أﻓﻀﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح 2‪ F‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض اﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬة اﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ ﻟﻠـ ‪) AutoCAD‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 37(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 37‬ ‫- 54 -‬
  • 44. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫اﻟﺪرس اﻟﺴﺎدس: اﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎت اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ‪Lesson 6: Working with Point Groups‬‬ ‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪم ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎت اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ‪ Point Group Manager‬ﻟﺘﻜﻮن ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎت ﻟﻠﻨﻘﺎط ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪاﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻨﺎء اﻷﺳﻄﺢ و ﻣﻬﺎم أﺧﺮى.‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ هﺬا اﻟﺪرس:‬ ‫1- ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Land Desktop‬‬ ‫2- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ File‬أﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Open‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Open Drawing: Project Based‬‬ ‫إن اﻟﻤﺴﺎر اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻤﺸﺮوع ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﺴﺎر 6002 ‪ C:Land Projects‬ﻓﺈن آﻨﺖ ﻗﺪ ﻏﻴﺮت هﺬا اﻟﻤﺴﺎر أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺼﻴﺐ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻓﻴﺠﺐ أن ﺗﻀﻊ ذﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ اﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎر.‬ ‫3- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Project Name‬اﺧﺘﺮ 2‪ TUTORIAL‬و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Select Project Drawing‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪Lesson-6.dwg‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫4- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Projects‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Workspaces‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Land Desktop‬ﻟﺘﻌﺮض ﻗﻮاﺋﻢ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Land Desktop‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻧﻘﺎط ‪Creating a Point Group‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻧﻘﺎط ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪاﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻨﺎء ﺳﻄﺢ و اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮي ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻘﺎط ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﻤﺴﺢ 2‪ Day‬و ﻟﻜﻦ ﻳﺠﺐ‬ ‫اﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﻧﻘﺎط اﻟﺮوﺑﻴﺮ ‪ Benchmarks‬و ﻧﻘﺎط اﻟﺪوران اﻟﻤﺆﻗﺘﺔ ‪.Temporary Turning Points‬‬ ‫1- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Points‬أﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Point Management‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ‪ Point Group Manager‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض‬ ‫ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Point Group Manager‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎت اﻟﻨﻘﺎط اﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮدة ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺸﺮوع ﺗﻌﺮض ﻓﻲ اﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ اﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Point Group Manager‬‬ ‫اﻵن ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻧﻘﺎط ﺟﺪﻳﺪة ﺑﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﻮدة ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﺸﺮوع و اﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﻧﻘﺎط ﻣﺨﺘﺎرة ﻣﻨﻬﺎ.‬ ‫2- اﺧﺘﺮ اﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ 2‪ DAY‬و اﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺰر اﻟﻔﺄرة اﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻓﻮﻗﻬﺎ و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Copy Point Group‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق‬ ‫اﻟﺤﻮار ‪) Create Point Group‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 47(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 47‬ ‫3- ادﺧﻞ ‪ DAY2-DTM‬ﻻﺳﻢ اﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ‪ Group Name‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪) Exclude‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 57(.‬ ‫4- اﺧﺘﺮ ‪) With Raw Desc Matching‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 57(.‬ ‫5- ادﺧﻞ 69,59,49,39,29 ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻒ ‪) Description‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 57(.‬ ‫6- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Apply‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﺜﻨﻲ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط اﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎرة ﻣﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 57(.‬ ‫و ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﻟﻴﺴﺘﺜﻨﻰ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط اﻟﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺮادﻩ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 57(.‬ ‫- 64 -‬
  • 45. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 57‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﺘﺮﺟﻊ إﻟﻰ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Point Group Manager‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﺠﺪ أن ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط اﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪة ﻗﺪ ﻋﺮﺿﺖ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ اﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ Point Group Manager‬ﻣﻊ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎت اﻟﻨﻘﺎط‬ ‫اﻷﺧﺮى ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ اﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﺳﺘﺠﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻘﺎط اﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮدة داﺧﻞ هﺬﻩ اﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 67(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 67‬ ‫إﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻧﻘﺎط ﺟﺪﻳﺪة ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ اﻟﻮﺻﻒ ‪Creating a Point Group Using the Raw Desc‬‬ ‫‪Matching Tab‬‬ ‫إن ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ Create Point Group‬ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻪ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ Raw Desc Matching‬و اﻟﺬي ﻳﻤﻜﻦ أن ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ ﻟﺘﺨﺘﺎر اﻟﻨﻘﺎط‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺻﻔﻬﺎ، و اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮدة و اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻀﻢ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰ اﻟﻮﺻﻒ ‪ Description Code‬ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻟﻮﺻﻒ ‪Description‬‬ ‫‪ Key Codes‬اﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮدة ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺸﺮوع.‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ: ﻳﻔﻀﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ Raw Desc Matching‬اﻟﺘﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط اﻟﻨﺎﺗﺠﺔ و ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر وﺻﻒ ﻳﺤﺘﻮي‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ رﻣﻮز ﺷﺎذة ‪.Wildcards‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪة ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ‪ Borehole‬و اﻟﺘﻲ وﺻﻔﻬﺎ هﻮ "21".‬ ‫1- ﻣﻦ اﻟـ ‪ ،Point Group Manager‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ أﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ‪) Create Point Group icon‬أول أﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ اﻷﻳﺴﺮ(‬ ‫)اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 77( ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Create Point Group‬‬ ‫- 74 -‬
  • 46. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 77‬ ‫2- أﻣﺎم اﺳﻢ اﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ‪ Group Name‬ادﺧﻞ ‪) Borehole‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 87(.‬ ‫3- ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ Raw Desc Matching‬اﺧﺘﺮ اﻟﻮﺻﻒ "21" )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 87(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 87‬ ‫4- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Apply‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ‪.Point List‬‬ ‫5- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮع إﻟﻰ ‪.Point Group Manager‬‬ ‫اﻵن و ﻗﺪ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط اﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪة، ﺳﺘﻘﻮم اﻵن ﺑﻘﻔﻞ هﺬﻩ اﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ‪ Borehole‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ.‬ ‫6- ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﻗﻮف ﻓﻮق اﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ‪ Borehole‬و اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر اﻟﻔﺄرة اﻷﻳﻤﻦ و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪Lock Point Group‬‬ ‫‪.Properties‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ أﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻟﺘﺸﻴﺮ إﻟﻰ أن اﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻘﻔﻠﺔ ‪) Locked‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 97(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 97‬ ‫- 84 -‬
  • 47. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ اﻟﻬﻴﻤﻨﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎت اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ‪Applying Overrides to Point Groups‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ اﻟﻬﻴﻤﻨﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻧﻘﺎط ‪ Point Group‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪد وﺻﻒ واﺣﺪ ﻟﻜﻞ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط.‬ ‫1- ﻓﻮق ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ‪ Control‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر اﻟﻔﺄرة اﻷﻳﻤﻦ و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Properties‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق‬ ‫اﻟﺤﻮار ‪) Point Group Properties‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 08(.‬ ‫2- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪) Overrides‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 08(.‬ ‫3- اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Description‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ داﺧﻞ اﻟﺨﻠﻴﺔ إﻟﻰ اﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 08(.‬ ‫4- ادﺧﻞ ‪ Control Point‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻒ اﻟﻤﻬﻴﻤﻦ ‪) Description override‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 08(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 08‬ ‫5- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮع إﻟﻰ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Point Group Manager‬‬ ‫أﺻﺒﺢ اﻵن وﺻﻒ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ‪ Control‬هﻮ ‪.Control Point‬‬ ‫6- ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﺮوج ﻣﻦ ‪.Point Group Manager‬‬ ‫7- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ View‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Named Views‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.View‬‬ ‫8- اﺧﺘﺮ 2 ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺖ ‪ Named‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Set Current‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫اﻵن ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺈدراج ﻧﻘﺎط ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ‪ Control‬إﻟﻰ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ.‬ ‫9- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Points‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Point Settings‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Point Settings‬‬ ‫01- ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ Insert‬و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Point Labeling‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈزاﻟﺔ اﻟﺨﻴﺎر ‪Use the Current Point Label Style When‬‬ ‫‪ Inserting Points‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) OK‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 18(.‬ ‫- 94 -‬
  • 48. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 18‬ ‫11- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Points‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Insert Points to Drawing‬ﺛﻢ ادﺧﻞ ‪ G‬ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎر ‪.Group‬‬ ‫21- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪) Select a Point Group‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 28(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 28‬ ‫31- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﺧﺘﺮ ‪) Control‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 28( ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫41- ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ رﺳﺎﻟﺔ ‪ Point in Drawing‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Replace ALL‬‬ ‫أﺻﺒﺢ وﺻﻒ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط اﻵن هﻮ ‪ Control Point‬آﻤﺎ هﻴﻤﻦ اﻟﻮﺻﻒ اﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 38(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 38‬ ‫إن اﻟﻨﻘﺎط اﻟﻤﺪﺧﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎت أﺧﺮى إﻟﻰ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﺄﺛﺮ ﺑﺘﻠﻚ اﻟﻬﻴﻤﻨﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻮﺻﻒ.‬ ‫- 05 -‬
  • 49. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎت اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ‪Updating Point Groups‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺤﺬف ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﻲ أآﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم اﻟﺨﺎﺻﻴﺔ ‪Show Changes to All Point Groups‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻐﻴﺮات اﻟﺘﻲ ﻃﺮأت ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎت اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﺛﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﺛﻬﺎ ﻟﺤﺬف اﻟﻨﻘﺎط اﻟﻤﺤﺬوﻓﺔ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻴﺎ.‬ ‫1- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Points‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Point Settings‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪.Preferences‬‬ ‫2- ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺖ ‪ Point Group Manager‬ﺗﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ‪.Check Status on Startup‬‬ ‫هﺬا اﻹﻋﺪاد ﻳﻜﺘﺸﻒ و ﻳﻌﻄﻲ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺮا ﻋﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎت اﻟﻨﻘﺎط إذا ﺣﺪث ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪة ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﻨﻘﺎط.‬ ‫3- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫4- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Points‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Edit Points‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪.Erase‬‬ ‫5- أدﺧﻞ ‪ N‬ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎر ‪.Numbers‬‬ ‫6- أدﺧﻞ 0201 ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﺤﺬف اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ رﻗﻢ 0201.‬ ‫7- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Points‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Point Management‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪.Point Group Manager‬‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻆ أن هﻨﺎك ﺛﻼث ﻣﻦ أرﺑﻊ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎت )‪ Borehole‬و 2‪ Day‬و ‪ (Day2-DTM‬ﻟﻬﻢ أﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﺘﺸﻴﺮ إﻟﻰ أﻧﻬﻢ ﻳﺤﺘﺎﺟﻮا إﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ‪) out-of-date‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 48(، ﻓﻲ هﺬﻩ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ إﻟﻰ أن ﻗﺎﻋﺪة اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﺗﺤﺘﺎج إﻟﻰ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ‪ out-of-date‬ﻷﻧﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻮي ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﺸﺮوع.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 48‬ ‫8- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ‪) Show Changes to All Point Groups‬ﺛﺎﻟﺚ أﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ اﻷﻳﺴﺮ( )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 48(.‬ ‫إن ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ Point Group Manager‬ﻳﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ اﻟﺘﻐﻴﺮات ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎت اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﺛﻢ ﻳﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪Changed Point‬‬ ‫‪) Groups‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 58(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 58‬ ‫اﻟﻌﻤﻮد ‪ Add/Remove‬ﻳﺤﺪد ﻣﺎ هﻮ ﻣﻄﻠﻮب ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ، ﻓﻲ هﺬﻩ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﻌﻤﻮد ﻳﺤﻮي ‪ Remove‬ﻷن اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ 0201 ﻟﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﺸﺮوع و ﻳﺠﺐ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎت اﻟﻨﻘﺎط.‬ ‫9- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ أﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ )‪) Update Point Group(s‬أول أﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ اﻷﻳﺴﺮ( )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 58(.‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎت اﻟﻨﻘﺎط و ﺳﻴﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ Point Group Manager‬ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى.‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻆ أن اﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺘﻴﻦ )2‪ Day‬و ‪ (Day2-DTM‬ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﻢ أﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﺗﺪل ﻋﻠﻰ أﻧﻬﻢ ﻳﺤﺘﺎﺟﺎن إﻟﻰ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ‪ out-of-date‬و ﻟﻜﻦ‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ‪ Borehole‬ﻣﺎزاﻟﺖ ﺗﻌﺮض هﺬﻩ اﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ. هﺬا ﻷن هﺬﻩ اﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻗﺪ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻘﻔﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ و ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺜﻬﺎ.‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻹزاﻟﺔ اﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ‪.Borehole‬‬ ‫01- اﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺰر اﻟﻔﺄرة اﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻓﻮق اﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ‪ Borehole‬و اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Unlock Point Group Properties‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻼﺣﻆ أن أﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ اﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﻗﺪ اﺧﺘﻔﺖ ﻣﻦ أﻣﺎم اﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ‪.Borehole‬‬ ‫11- اﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺰر اﻟﻔﺄرة اﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻓﻮق اﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ‪ Borehole‬و اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) Update‬أو اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ اﻟﺮاﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ‬ ‫اﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ آﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎت اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﺳﻮﻳﺎ( )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 68(.‬ ‫21- أﻏﻠﻖ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Point Group Manager‬‬ ‫- 15 -‬
  • 50. By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials 86 ‫ﺷﻜﻞ‬ - 52 -
  • 51. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫اﻟﺪرس اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻊ: ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻒ ‪Organizing Points by Descriptions‬‬ ‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪم ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻟﻮﺻﻒ ‪ Description Keys‬ﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ اﻟﻮﺻﻒ اﻟﺨﺎم ‪ Raw Descriptions‬اﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮظ داﺧﻞ ﻗﺎﻋﺪة ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﻨﻘﺎط‬ ‫‪ Point Database‬إﻟﻰ وﺻﻒ آﺎﻣﻞ ‪ Full Description‬ﻟﺘﺨﺼﺺ رﻣﻮز ﻣﻊ هﺬﻩ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط و ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻃﺒﻘﺎت اﻟﻨﻘﺎط و اﻟﺮﻣﻮز‬ ‫أﻳﻀﺎ.‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ هﺬا اﻟﺪرس:‬ ‫1- ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Land Desktop‬‬ ‫2- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ File‬أﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Open‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Open Drawing: Project Based‬‬ ‫إن اﻟﻤﺴﺎر اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻤﺸﺮوع ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﺴﺎر 6002 ‪ C:Land Projects‬ﻓﺈن آﻨﺖ ﻗﺪ ﻏﻴﺮت هﺬا اﻟﻤﺴﺎر أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺼﻴﺐ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻓﻴﺠﺐ أن ﺗﻀﻊ ذﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ اﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎر.‬ ‫3- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Project Name‬اﺧﺘﺮ 2‪ TUTORIAL‬و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Select Project Drawing‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪Lesson-7.dwg‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫4- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Projects‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Workspaces‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Land Desktop‬ﻟﺘﻌﺮض ﻗﻮاﺋﻢ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Land Desktop‬‬ ‫إﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح وﺻﻒ ‪Creating a Description Key File‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﻠﻒ ﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎح وﺻﻒ، أوﻻ ﺗﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺎر اﻟﺮﻣﻮز ‪ Symbol‬ﻟﻠﻜﺘﻠﺔ ‪ Block‬اﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ إدراﺟﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺪدة ﺑﻤﻔﺘﺎح وﺻﻒ.‬ ‫1- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Points‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Point Settings‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Point Settings‬‬ ‫2- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ Insert‬و ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Search Path for Symbol Block Drawing Files‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ Browse‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Browse for Folder‬‬ ‫3- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Select a Path‬اﺧﺘﺮ اﻟﻤﺴﺎر اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ:‬ ‫‪C:Documents and SettingsAll UsersApplication DataAutodeskAutodesk Land Desktop‬‬ ‫‪2006R16.2DataSymbol ManagerCogo_metric‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ هﺎﻣﺔ: ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ اﺳﺘﻌﺮاض هﺬا اﻟﻤﺴﺎر ﻳﺠﺐ أوﻻ أن ﺗﻘﻮم ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎء ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ إﺧﻔﺎء اﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎت و اﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪات ﻣﻦ ﻧﻈﺎم اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫®‪ Windows‬و ﻟﺘﻔﻌﻞ ذﻟﻚ اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ:‬ ‫4- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Start‬ﺛﻢ أﺧﺘﺮ ‪.Control Panel‬‬ ‫5- ﻣﻦ ﻧﺎﻓﺬة ‪ Control Panel‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Folder Options‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Folder Options‬‬ ‫6- ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ View‬و ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Advanced Settings‬اذهﺐ إﻟﻰ ‪ Hidden files and folders‬و اﺧﺘﺮ ‪Show‬‬ ‫‪) hidden files and folders‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 78(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 78‬ ‫ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮع إﻟﻰ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Point Settings‬‬ ‫- 35 -‬
  • 52. By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials Use the Current Point Label Style When Inserting Points ‫ ﺗﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر‬Point Labeling ‫7- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺴﻢ‬ .(88 ‫)اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬ 88 ‫ﺷﻜﻞ‬ Match on ‫ ﺗﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر‬Matching Options ‫ و ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ‬Description Keys ‫8- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬ .(89 ‫ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬OK ‫ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬Description Parameters ($1, $2, etc.) 89 ‫ﺷﻜﻞ‬ Description Key Manager ‫ و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ‬Point Management ‫ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬Points ‫9- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ .Description Key Manager ‫ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار‬ .(90 ‫ )أول أﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ اﻷﻳﺴﺮ( )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬Create DescKey File ‫01- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ أﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ‬ - 54 -
  • 53. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 09‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪) Create Description Key File‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 19(.‬ ‫11- أدﺧﻞ ‪ CREW-B‬أﻣﺎم اﺳﻢ اﻟﻤﻠﻒ ‪) DescKey File name‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 19( ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﺘﺮﺟﻊ إﻟﻰ ﺻﻨﺪوق‬ ‫اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Description Key Manager‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 19‬ ‫إﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﻔﺘﺎح وﺻﻒ ‪Creating Description Keys‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ وﺻﻒ ‪ Create Description Keys‬ﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺣﺎﻓﺔ اﻟﺮﺻﻴﻒ و اﻟﻘﻀﺒﺎن اﻟﺤﺪﻳﺪﻳﺔ و اﻷﺷﺠﺎر‬ ‫داﺧﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﻮﺻﻒ اﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ، ﻳﺠﺐ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ أن أﺳﻤﺎء ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ اﻟﻮﺻﻒ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﺔ ﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ اﻷﺣﺮف ‪ case-sensitive‬ﻓﻤﺜﻼ اﻟﻮﺻﻒ ‪TREE‬‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ اﻟﻮﺻﻒ ‪ Tree‬و آﻼهﻤﺎ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ اﻟﻮﺻﻒ ‪.tree‬‬ ‫أوﻻ، ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﻔﺘﺎح وﺻﻒ ﻟﺤﺎﻓﺔ اﻟﺮﺻﻴﻒ ‪.Edge of Pavement‬‬ ‫1- اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ CREW-B‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ أﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ‪) Create DescKey‬اﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ اﻷﻳﺴﺮ( )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 29(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 29‬ ‫2- ادﺧﻞ ‪ EP‬أﻣﺎم ‪ ،DescKey Code‬ﺛﻢ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ General‬أدﺧﻞ ‪ EP‬أﻣﺎم ‪ Description Format‬و أدﺧﻞ‬ ‫‪ PNT_EP‬أﻣﺎم ‪) Point Layer‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 39(.‬ ‫3- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Symbol Insertion‬ﺗﺄآﺪ أن ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Symbol Block Name‬ﺗﻌﺮض >‪ <none‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮع‬ ‫إﻟﻰ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪) Description Key Manager‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 39(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 39‬ ‫- 55 -‬
  • 54. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﺸﺊ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح وﺻﻒ ﻟﻠﻘﻀﺒﺎن اﻟﺤﺪﻳﺪﻳﺔ ‪.Iron Bar‬‬ ‫4- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ‪ Create DescKey‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Create Description Key dialog‬‬ ‫5- ادﺧﻞ ‪ IB‬أﻣﺎم ‪ ،DescKey Code‬ﺛﻢ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ General‬أدﺧﻞ ‪ IB‬أﻣﺎم ‪ Description Format‬و أدﺧﻞ‬ ‫‪ PNT_IB‬أﻣﺎم ‪) Point Layer‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 49(.‬ ‫6- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Symbol Insertion‬و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Symbol Block Name‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ bound‬ﺛﻢ ادﺧﻞ ‪ MONUMENT‬أﻣﺎم‬ ‫‪) Symbol Layer‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 49(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 49‬ ‫7- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ Scale/Rotate Symbol‬و ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Scale Symbol By‬ﺗﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ‪Current Dwg‬‬ ‫0001:1 :‪) Scale‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 59(.‬ ‫8- و ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Apply Scale To‬ﺗﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ‪) X-Y Dimensions‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 59( ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮع إﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Description Key Manager‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 59‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﺸﺊ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح وﺻﻒ ﻟﻸﺷﺠﺎر.‬ ‫9- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ‪ Create DescKey‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Create Description Key dialog‬‬ ‫01- ادﺧﻞ ‪ Tree‬أﻣﺎم ‪ ،DescKey Code‬ﺛﻢ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ General‬أدﺧﻞ ‪ $2mm $1 Tree‬أﻣﺎم ‪Description‬‬ ‫‪ Format‬و أدﺧﻞ ‪ PNT_TREE‬أﻣﺎم ‪) Point Layer‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 69(.‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ: إن هﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻟﻮﺻﻒ ‪ $2mm $1 Tree‬ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﺿﻮاﺑﻂ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻒ ‪ ،Description Parameters‬و هﻲ ﺗﻘﻮم ﺑﺈﻋﺎدة‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻧﺺ اﻟﻮﺻﻒ اﻟﺬي ﺗﺪﺧﻠﻪ، ﻓﻲ ﺧﻄﻮات ﻻﺣﻘﺔ، ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﺑﻌﺾ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﻟﺘﻤﺜﻴﻞ اﻷﺷﺠﺎر ﻓﺒﺈدﺧﺎل 021 ‪ Tree Maple‬آﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺳﺘﻨﺸﺊ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻨﻮاﻧﻬﺎ .‪.120 mm Maple Tree‬‬ ‫- 65 -‬
  • 55. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫11- ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Symbol Insertion‬و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Symbol Block Name‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ tree‬و أدﺧﻞ ‪ TREE‬أﻣﺎم ‪Symbol‬‬ ‫‪) Layer‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 69(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 69‬ ‫21- أﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ Scale/Rotate Symbol‬و ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Scale Symbol By‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪Description Parameter‬‬ ‫و أﺧﺘﺮ 2 ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ $ و أزل اﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﻣﻦ أﻣﺎم 0001:1 :‪) Current Drawing Scale‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 79(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 79‬ ‫31- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮع إﻟﻰ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ Description Key Manager‬ﺛﻢ أﻏﻠﻖ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪Description‬‬ ‫‪.Key Manager‬‬ ‫ﻟﻘﺪ ﻗﻤﺖ اﻵن ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﺛﻼث ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻒ ﺟﺪﻳﺪة.‬ ‫إﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﺴﻖ اﻟﻌﻨﻮان ‪Creating a Label Style‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﺴﻖ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻠﻌﻨﺎوﻳﻦ ‪ Labels‬ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ اﻟﻮﺻﻒ ‪ Description Keys‬دون اﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ إﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ اﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻌﻨﺎوﻳﻦ ‪ Labels‬ﻟﻠﻨﻘﺎط.‬ ‫1- ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Labels‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Edit Label Styles‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار‪.Edit Label Styles‬‬ ‫2- ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ Point Label Styles‬و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Name‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪) active desckeys only‬ﻻﺣﻆ اﻧﻪ ﺑﻤﺠﺮد إﺗﻤﺎم‬ ‫اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻣﺤﻮ اﻟﻨﺺ اﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮد ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ (Text‬ﻓﺘﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ أن اﻟﻘﺴﻢ ‪ Text‬ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻪ أي ﻧﺼﻮص )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 89(.‬ ‫- 75 -‬
  • 56. By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials 98 ‫ﺷﻜﻞ‬ .(99 ‫ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬Name ‫ أﻣﺎم‬DescKey Only - Crew-B ‫3- أدﺧﻞ‬ ‫ اﺧﺘﺮ‬DescKey file ‫ ﺛﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬DescKey Matching On ‫ ﺗﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر‬Description Keys ‫4- ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ‬ .(99 ‫ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬CREW-B .(99 ‫ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬Insert DescKey Symbol ‫ و‬Substitute DescKey Description ‫5- ﺗﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر آﻼ ﻣﻦ‬ 99 ‫ﺷﻜﻞ‬ .OK ‫ ﺛﻢ‬Save ‫6- أﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ - 58 -
  • 57. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫إدراج ﻧﻘﺎط ﺑﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ وﺻﻒ ‪Inserting Points with Description Keys‬‬ ‫إﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﻘﺎط ﺟﺪﻳﺪة ﻣﻊ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ اﻟﻮﺻﻒ، أوﻻ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻧﺴﻖ اﻟﻌﻨﻮﻧﺔ ‪ Label Style‬اﻟﻨﺸﻂ إﻟﻰ ‪.DescKey Only- Crew-B‬‬ ‫1- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Labels‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Settings‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Label Settings‬‬ ‫2- ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ Point Labels‬و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Current Label Style‬أﺧﺘﺮ ‪ DescKey Only - Crew-B‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪.OK‬‬ ‫اﻵن ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﻘﺎط ﻳﺪوﻳﺎ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻟﺘﺨﺘﺒﺮ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻟﻮﺻﻒ اﻟﺬي أﻧﺸﺄﺗﻪ، ﻣﻮاﺿﻊ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط و ﻣﻨﺎﺳﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻲء اﻟﻬﺎم هﻨﺎ.‬ ‫3- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ View‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Named Views‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ View‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ 2 ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺖ ‪ Named‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ Set Current‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫4- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Points‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Create Points‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ أﺧﺘﺮ ‪.Manual‬‬ ‫5- ﺣﺪد أي ﻣﻜﺎن ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻟﻠﻨﻘﻄﺔ اﻷوﻟﻰ ﺛﻢ أدﺧﻞ ‪ EP‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻒ ‪) Description‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 001(.‬ ‫6- ﺣﺪد أﻳﻀﺎ أي ﻣﻜﺎن ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻟﻠﻨﻘﻄﺔ اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ و أدﺧﻞ ‪ IB‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻒ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 001(.‬ ‫7- ﺣﺪد ﻣﻜﺎن ﻟﻠﻨﻘﻄﺔ اﻟﺜﺎﻟﺜﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ و أدﺧﻞ 021 ‪ Tree Maple‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻒ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 001(.‬ ‫8- ﺣﺪد ﻣﻜﺎن ﻟﻠﻨﻘﻄﺔ اﻟﺮاﺑﻌﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ و أدﺧﻞ 003 ‪ Tree Oak‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻒ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 001(.‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻘﻮم اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ Land Desktop‬ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﻃﺒﻘﺎت ‪ Layers‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ إذا ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﻣﻮﺟﻮدة داﺧﻞ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻟﻴﺘﻮاﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻔﺎت ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ اﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫‪.Description Key Definitions‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 001‬ ‫- 95 -‬
  • 58. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫اﻟﺪرس اﻟﺜﺎﻣﻦ: اﺳﺘﻴﺮاد ﻧﻘﺎط ﻣﻦ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ ASCII‬اﻟﻨﺼﻲ ‪Lesson 8: Importing Points from an ASCII Text File‬‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺟﺪ اﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ هﻴﺌﺎت ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻨﻘﺎط اﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻋﻨﺪ اﺳﺘﻴﺮاد اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪة ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺸﺮوع، ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ أﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ هﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻒ ﻟﺘﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻊ هﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺁﺧﺮ، ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺪرس ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء هﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻧﺼﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮع ‪ ASCII‬و ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ اﺳﺘﻴﺮاد اﻟﻨﻘﺎط إﻟﻰ‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺸﺮوع.‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ هﺬا اﻟﺪرس:‬ ‫1- ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Land Desktop‬‬ ‫2- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ File‬أﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Open‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Open Drawing: Project Based‬‬ ‫إن اﻟﻤﺴﺎر اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻤﺸﺮوع ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﺴﺎر 6002 ‪ C:Land Projects‬ﻓﺈن آﻨﺖ ﻗﺪ ﻏﻴﺮت هﺬا اﻟﻤﺴﺎر أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺼﻴﺐ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻓﻴﺠﺐ أن ﺗﻀﻊ ذﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ اﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎر.‬ ‫3- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Project Name‬اﺧﺘﺮ 2‪ TUTORIAL‬و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Select Project Drawing‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪Lesson-8.dwg‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫4- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Projects‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Workspaces‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Land Desktop‬ﻟﺘﻌﺮض ﻗﻮاﺋﻢ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Land Desktop‬‬ ‫إﻧﺸﺎء هﻴﺌﺔ ﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻧﻘﺎط ‪Creating a Point File Format‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء هﻴﺌﺔ ‪ Format‬ﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻧﻘﺎط ﻟﺘﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻊ هﻴﺌﺔ اﻟﻤﻠﻒ اﻟﻤﺮاد اﺳﺘﻴﺮاد اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﻣﻨﻪ، و ﻓﻲ هﺬﻩ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺳﻴﻜﻮن‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ آﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ: ‪ Northing‬ﺛﻢ ‪ Easting‬ﺛﻢ ‪ Elevation‬ﺛﻢ ‪.Description‬‬ ‫1- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Points‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Import/Export Points‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Format Manager‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق‬ ‫اﻟﺤﻮار ‪) Format Manager‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 101(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 101‬ ‫2- أﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Add‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪) Format Manager - Select Format Type‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 201(.‬ ‫3- ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪) User Point File‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 201( ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪Point File‬‬ ‫‪.Format‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 201‬ ‫4- ادﺧﻞ ‪ Tutorial‬أﻣﺎم ‪ Format Name‬و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻻﻣﺘﺪاد اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ‪ Default Extension‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ .txt‬ﺛﻢ ادﺧﻞ !‬ ‫)ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﻌﺠﺐ ‪ (Exclamation Point‬أﻣﺎم ‪) Comment Tag‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 301(.‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺮك ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻻﻣﺘﺪاد اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ‪ Default Extension‬ﺧﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ اﻣﺘﺪاد اﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺸﺎﺋﻌﺔ.‬ ‫- 06 -‬
  • 59. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫5- اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Delimited By‬ﺛﻢ ﺗﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ أن اﻟﺨﺎﻧﺔ إﻟﻰ اﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ‪ Delimited By‬ﺧﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ أي ﻧﺺ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 301(.‬ ‫هﺬا ﻳﻌﻨﻲ أن هﻴﺌﺔ اﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺗﺤﺘﻮي ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﻮاﺻﻞ و هﻲ اﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺎت ‪ ،Space Delimited‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ هﺬا اﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ آﻤﺎ ﺗﺸﺎء ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﻜﻮن‬ ‫اﻟﻔﺎﺻﻠﺔ ‪ Comma‬أو أي ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺎت اﻟﺘﺮﻗﻴﻢ ‪ Punctuation‬آﻔﺎﺻﻞ.‬ ‫6- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Load‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ Select Source File‬ﺛﻢ اذهﺐ إﻟﻰ اﻟﻤﺴﺎر اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ:‬ ‫‪Land Projects 2006Tutorial2Survey‬‬ ‫و اﺧﺘﺮ اﻟﻤﻠﻒ ‪ Topo_pnt.txt‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Open‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض اﻷﺳﻄﺮ اﻷوﻟﻰ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺠﺰء اﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 301(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 301‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪد ﻧﻮع اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﻟﻜﻞ ﻋﻤﻮد ﻟﻴﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻊ هﻴﺌﺔ اﻟﻤﻠﻒ.‬ ‫7- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ أول >‪ <unused‬رأس اﻟﻌﻤﻮد ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ اﻟﻴﺴﺎر )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 201( ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض - ‪Format Manager‬‬ ‫‪) Select Column Name‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 401(.‬ ‫8- ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ أﻣﺎم ‪ Column Name‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Northing‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮع إﻟﻰ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪Point File‬‬ ‫‪) Format‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 401(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 401‬ ‫9- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <unused‬ﻓﻲ رأس اﻟﻌﻤﻮد اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪Format Manager - Select Column‬‬ ‫‪.Name‬‬ ‫- 16 -‬
  • 60. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫01- ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Easting‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮع إﻟﻰ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Point File Format‬‬ ‫11- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <unused‬ﻓﻲ رأس اﻟﻌﻤﻮد اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪Format Manager - Select Column‬‬ ‫‪.Name‬‬ ‫21- ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Elevation‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮع إﻟﻰ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Point File Format‬‬ ‫31- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <unused‬ﻓﻲ رأس اﻟﻌﻤﻮد اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪Format Manager - Select Column‬‬ ‫‪.Name‬‬ ‫41- ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Description‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮع إﻟﻰ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Point File Format‬‬ ‫51- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Parse‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﺗﺤﺖ اﻷﻋﻤﺪة اﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪة )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 501(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 501‬ ‫61- ﺗﺼﻔﺢ اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت و ﺗﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ أن اﻟﻬﻴﺌﺔ ‪ Format‬اﻟﺬي أﻧﺸﺄﺗﻪ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻣﻊ اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت داﺧﻞ اﻟﻤﻠﻒ.‬ ‫71- أﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮع إﻟﻰ ‪ Format Manager‬و ﺗﺄآﺪ أن اﻟﻤﻠﻒ ‪ Tutorial‬ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺁﺧﺮ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺛﻢ أﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪OK‬‬ ‫)اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 601(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 601‬ ‫ﺑﻬﺬا ﺗﻜﻮن ﻗﺪ أﻧﻬﻴﺖ ﺧﻄﻮات إﻋﺪاد هﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻟﻠﻨﻘﺎط ﻻﺳﺘﻴﺮاد اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﻟﻠﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ.‬ ‫- 26 -‬
  • 61. By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials Importing an ASCII Text Point File ‫ ﻧﺼﻲ‬ASCII ‫اﺳﺘﻴﺮاد ﻣﻠﻒ ﻧﻘﺎط‬ .‫ إﻟﻲ ﻗﺎﻋﺪة ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﻨﻘﺎط و اﻟﺮﺳﻢ أﻳﻀﺎ‬ASCII ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻴﺮاد اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﻣﻦ ﻣﻠﻒ‬ ‫ ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض‬Import Options ‫ و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ‬Import/Export Points ‫ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬Points ‫1- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ .COGO Database Import Options ‫ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار‬ Use ‫ ﺗﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر‬What to do when point numbers need to be assigned to the points ‫2- ﻣﻦ أﻣﺎم‬ .(107 ‫ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺮار )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬OK ‫ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬next point number 107 ‫ﺷﻜﻞ‬ ‫ ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق‬Import Points ‫ و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ‬Import/Export Points ‫ اﺧﺘﺮ‬Points ‫3- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ .Format Manager - Import Points ‫اﻟﺤﻮار‬ .(108 ‫ هﻮ: )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬Source File ‫ ﺛﻢ ﺗﺄآﺪ أن‬Tutorial ‫ اﺧﺘﺮ‬Format ‫4- ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ Land Projects 2006Tutorial2SurveyTopo_pnt.txt. Create New Point ‫ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 801( ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ‬Add Points to Point Group ‫5- ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر‬ .Format Manager - Create Group ‫ ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض‬Group 108 ‫ﺷﻜﻞ‬ Format ‫ ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮع إﻟﻰ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار‬OK ‫ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 901( ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬Name ‫ أﻣﺎم‬Topo_Area1 ‫6- أدﺧﻞ‬ COGO Database Import ‫ ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار‬OK ‫ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬Manager - Import Points .Options 109 ‫ﺷﻜﻞ‬ - 63 -
  • 62. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫7- أﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﺘﻐﻠﻖ ‪ COGO Database Import Options‬و ﺑﺪء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط.‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط و ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﻋﺪة اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت و إدراﺟﻬﺎ إﻟﻰ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 011(.‬ ‫8- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ View‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Named Views‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ View‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ 2 ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺖ ‪ Named‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ Set Current‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 011‬ ‫9- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Points‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ List Points‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.List Points‬‬ ‫01- ﺗﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ‪) Enable Filtering‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 111(.‬ ‫11- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Reset‬ﻟﺘﻤﺤﻮ اﺧﺘﻴﺎرك اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 111(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 111‬ ‫- 46 -‬
  • 63. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫21- أﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ Point Groups‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط 1‪ Topo_Area‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪) List‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬ ‫211(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 211‬ ‫31- ﺑﻌﺪ اﻧﺘﻬﺎﺋﻚ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺸﺎهﺪة ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط أﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫- 56 -‬
  • 64. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫اﻟﺪرس اﻟﺘﺎﺳﻊ: ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ اﻟﺨﻄﻮط و اﻟﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﺎت و اﻷﺷﻜﺎل اﻟﺤﻠﺰوﻧﻴﺔ و اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ,‪Lesson 9: Labeling Lines, Curves‬‬ ‫‪Spirals and Points‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ اﻟﺨﻄﻮط و اﻟﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﺎت و اﻷﺷﻜﺎل اﻟﺤﻠﺰوﻧﻴﺔ و اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﻟﺘﻀﻴﻒ اﻟﺤﻮاﺷﻲ إﻟﻰ رﺳﻤﻚ ﻣﺜﻞ اﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ و اﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ و أﻧﺼﺎف‬ ‫اﻷﻗﻄﺎر.‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ هﺬا اﻟﺪرس:‬ ‫1- ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Land Desktop‬‬ ‫2- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ File‬أﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Open‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Open Drawing: Project Based‬‬ ‫إن اﻟﻤﺴﺎر اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻤﺸﺮوع ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﺴﺎر 6002 ‪ C:Land Projects‬ﻓﺈن آﻨﺖ ﻗﺪ ﻏﻴﺮت هﺬا اﻟﻤﺴﺎر أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺼﻴﺐ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻓﻴﺠﺐ أن ﺗﻀﻊ ذﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ اﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎر.‬ ‫3- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Project Name‬اﺧﺘﺮ 1‪ TUTORIAL‬و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Select Project Drawing‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪Lesson-9.dwg‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫4- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Projects‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Workspaces‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Land Desktop‬ﻟﺘﻌﺮض ﻗﻮاﺋﻢ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Land Desktop‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ إﻋﺪادات اﻟﻌﻨﻮﻧﺔ ‪Changing Label Settings‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﺤﺪد إﻋﺪادات ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ ‪ Label Settings‬اﻟﺨﻄﻮط و اﻟﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﺎت و اﻟﻨﻘﺎط.‬ ‫1- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Labels‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Settings‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Label Settings‬‬ ‫2- ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ General‬ﺗﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ‪) Update Labels When Objects Change‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 311(.‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ‪ Update Labels When Objects Change‬ﻓﺈن اﻟﻌﻨﺎوﻳﻦ اﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮآﺔ ‪ Dynamic Labels‬ﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﺗﺒﻌﺎ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫اﻟﻜﺎﺋﻦ ‪ Object‬اﻟﻤﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﺑﻪ.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 311‬ ‫3- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ Line Labels‬و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Current Label Style‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪direction above, distance‬‬ ‫‪) below‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 411(.‬ ‫4- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Forced Bearings‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪) North‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 411(.‬ ‫- 66 -‬
  • 65. By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials 114 ‫ﺷﻜﻞ‬ stacked above - radius, ‫ اﺧﺘﺮ‬Current Label Style ‫ و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬Curve Labels ‫5- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬ .(115 ‫ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬length, tan, delta 115 ‫ﺷﻜﻞ‬ ‫ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 611( ﺛﻢ‬all point data ‫ اﺧﺘﺮ‬Current Label Style ‫ و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬Point Labels ‫6- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬ .OK ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ 116 ‫ﺷﻜﻞ‬ - 67 -
  • 66. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ اﻟﺨﻄﻮط و اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ‪Labeling Lines and Points‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﻌﺰل اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺘﻴﻦ ‪ Boundary‬و ‪ Pnt_control‬و ﺗﻘﻮم ﺑﻌﻨﻮﻧﺔ ﺧﻂ اﻟـ ‪ Boundary‬و ﻧﻘﺎط اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ‪Control‬‬ ‫‪.Points‬‬ ‫1- ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﺮ اﻷواﻣﺮ ادﺧﻞ ‪ LAI‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ﺧﻂ اﻟﺤﺪود اﻷزرق و أي ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﺎط اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ اﻟﺴﺖ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 711( ﺛﻢ‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ ،Layer(s) to isolate‬ﺗﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ اﺳﻢ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺘﻴﻦ أﻣﺎم اﻟﺨﺎﻧﺔ ‪Enter Item‬‬ ‫)اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 811( ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 711‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 811‬ ‫2- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ أﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ‪ Layer Properties Manager‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ اﻷدوات ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪Layer Manager‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ‪ Boundary_label‬و ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎرهﺎ آﺎﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪) Current Layer‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 911( ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪.OK‬‬ ‫- 86 -‬
  • 67. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 911‬ ‫3- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Labels‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Add Static Labels‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﺧﻄﻮط اﻟﺤﺪود اﻟﺰرﻗﺎء و اﻟﺴﺖ ﻧﻘﺎط ﻣﻦ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Enter‬‬ ‫4- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ View‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Named Views‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ View‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ 2 ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺖ ‪ Named‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ Set Current‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪) OK‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 021(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 021‬ ‫ﻟﻮ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ ‪ Label‬إﻟﻰ ﻣﺘﻌﺪد اﻟﺨﻄﻮط ‪ Polyline‬ﻓﺈن آﺎﻧﺖ ‪ Static Label‬وﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻔﺠﻴﺮ ‪ Explode‬ﻣﺘﻌﺪد اﻟﺨﻄﻮط‬ ‫‪ Polyline‬ﻓﺴﻴﻈﻞ اﻟـ ‪ Static Label‬آﻤﺎ هﻮ أﻣﺎ ﻟﻮ آﺎﻧﺖ ‪ Dynamic Label‬و ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻔﺠﻴﺮ ‪ Explode‬ﻣﺘﻌﺪد اﻟﺨﻄﻮط‬ ‫‪ Polyline‬ﻓﺴﻴﺨﺘﻔﻲ اﻟـ ‪.Dynamic Label‬‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻌﺪ اﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺎت ﻋﻼﻣﺔ اﻟﻘﺪم )'( ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ أن وﺣﺪات اﻟﺮﺳﻢ هﻲ اﻟﻤﺘﺮ و هﺬا ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻧﺴﻖ اﻟﻌﻨﻮﻧﺔ ‪Label Style‬‬ ‫‪ Definition‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ هﺬا اﻟﺨﻂ ﻟﻴﺴﺘﺨﺪم اﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ اﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺪات اﻟﻘﻴﺎس اﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ، أﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﻨﺎوﻳﻦ آﻼ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺨﻄﻮط و اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﺗﻢ‬ ‫إﻧﺸﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ‪ Boundary_label‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻧﺴﻖ اﻟﻌﻨﻮﻧﺔ اﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎر ﺣﺪد ﻟﻴﻀﻊ اﻟﻌﻨﻮﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ.‬ ‫5- ادﺧﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﺮ اﻷواﻣﺮ ‪ LOA‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﻔﺘﺢ آﻞ ﻃﺒﻘﺎت اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى.‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻌﺰل ﻃﺒﻘﺔ ﻗﻄﻊ اﻷراﺿﻲ ‪ Lots‬ﺛﻢ ﺗﻌﻨﻮن ﺧﻄﻮط ﻗﻄﻊ اﻷراﺿﻲ.‬ ‫6- أدﺧﻞ ‪ LAI‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻣﺮﺗﺎن ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ ،Layer(s) to isolate‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Layers‬اﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫‪ LOT_LINES‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) OK‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 121(.‬ ‫- 96 -‬
  • 68. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 121‬ ‫7- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ أﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ‪ Layer Properties Manager‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ اﻷدوات ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪Layer Manager‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ‪ Lot_label‬و ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎرهﺎ آﺎﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪) Current Layer‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 121( ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 221‬ ‫8- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Labels‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Show Dialog Bar‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺷﺮﻳﻂ اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Style Properties‬‬ ‫9- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ Curve‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Current Label Style‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪) length above, radius below‬اﻧﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 321(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 321‬ ‫01- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ View‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Named Views‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ View‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ 3 ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺖ ‪ Named‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ Set Current‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫11- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Labels‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Add Dynamic Labels‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ آﻞ ﺧﻄﻮط ﻗﻄﻊ اﻷراﺿﻲ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬ ‫421(.‬ ‫ﺳﺘﺠﺪ أن ﺧﻄﻮط ﻗﻄﻊ اﻷراﺿﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺘﻬﺎ و ﻟﻜﻦ ﺑﻌﻀﻬﺎ ﻳﺤﺘﺎج إﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﻟﺘﺪاﺧﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻮق ﺑﻌﺾ.‬ ‫- 07 -‬
  • 69. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 421‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ اﻟﻌﻨﻮان اﻟﻤﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﺑﻜﺎﺋﻦ ‪Changing a Label Attached to an Object‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻐﻴﺮ اﻟﻌﻨﻮان ﺑﻤﻘﺎﻳﻀﺔ اﻟﻨﺺ ﺣﻮل ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ آﺎﺋﻦ و ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻧﺴﻖ اﻟﻌﻨﻮﻧﺔ ‪.Label Style‬‬ ‫1- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Labels‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Swap Label Text‬اﺧﺘﺮ اﻟﺨﻂ اﻟﻤﺸﺎر إﻟﻴﻪ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺸﻜﻞ 421 ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪) Enter‬اﻧﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 521(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 521‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺴﻖ اﻟﻌﻨﻮﻧﺔ ﻟﺨﻂ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ أرض ‪.Lot‬‬ ‫2- ﻣﻦ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ Style Properties‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ Line‬ﺛﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Current Label Style‬اﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫‪) stacked below - direction, distance‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 621(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 621‬ ‫3- اﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻔﺲ اﻟﺨﻂ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ و اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر اﻟﻔﺄرة اﻷﻳﻤﻦ و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪.Delete Labels‬‬ ‫إن اﻷﻣﺮ ‪ Delete Labels‬ﻳﻘﻮم ﺑﺤﺬف اﻟﻌﻨﻮﻧﺔ اﻟﻤﺮﺗﺒﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﺋﻦ اﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎر ﻋﻠﻰ أي ﻣﻦ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺎت.‬ ‫- 17 -‬
  • 70. By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials ‫ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬Enter ‫ ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻔﺲ اﻟﺨﻂ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬Add Dynamic Labels ‫ اﺧﺘﺮ‬Labels ‫4- ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ .(127 127 ‫ﺷﻜﻞ‬ - 72 -
  • 71. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫اﻟﺪرس اﻟﻌﺎﺷﺮ: إﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﺴﻖ اﻟﻌﻨﻮﻧﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﻄﻮط و اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ‪Lesson 10: Creating Label Styles for Lines and‬‬ ‫‪Points‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺪرس ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﺴﻘﻚ اﻟﺨﺎص ﻟﻌﻨﻮﻧﺔ اﻟﺨﻄﻮط واﻟﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﺎت و اﻟﺤﻠﺰون و اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﻟﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ اﺣﺘﻴﺎﺟﺎﺗﻚ.‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ هﺬا اﻟﺪرس:‬ ‫1- ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Land Desktop‬‬ ‫2- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ File‬أﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Open‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Open Drawing: Project Based‬‬ ‫إن اﻟﻤﺴﺎر اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻤﺸﺮوع ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﺴﺎر 6002 ‪ C:Land Projects‬ﻓﺈن آﻨﺖ ﻗﺪ ﻏﻴﺮت هﺬا اﻟﻤﺴﺎر أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺼﻴﺐ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻓﻴﺠﺐ أن ﺗﻀﻊ ذﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ اﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎر.‬ ‫3- ﻣﻦ ﻗــﺎﺋــﻤﺔ ‪ Project Name‬اﺧــﺘـــﺮ 1‪ TUTORIAL‬و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Select Project Drawing‬اﺧــﺘــــﺮ‬ ‫‪ Lesson-10.dwg‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫4- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Projects‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Workspaces‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Land Desktop‬ﻟﺘﻌﺮض ﻗﻮاﺋﻢ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Land Desktop‬‬ ‫إﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﺴﻖ ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻠﺨﻄﻮط ‪Creating a New Line Label Style‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﺴﻖ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻧﺴﻖ ﻣﻮﺟﻮد ﻓﻲ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ و إدﻣﺎج اﻟﻄﻮل ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺗﻲ اﻟﻘﻴﺎس اﻟﻤﺘﺮ و اﻟﻘﺪم ﻓﻮق اﻟﺨﻂ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻈﻬﺮ اﻟﻘﻴﺎس ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺪم و ﺗﺤﺖ اﻟﺨﻂ ﺳﺘﻀﻊ اﻹﺣﺪاﺛﻲ ‪ X‬و ‪ Y‬ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﻲ اﻟﺒﺪاﻳﺔ و اﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ.‬ ‫1- ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Labels‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Edit Label Styles‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Edit Label Styles‬‬ ‫2- ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ Line Label Styles‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Name List‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪) distance above, direction below‬اﻧﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 821(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 821‬ ‫3- ادﺧﻞ ‪ Lot Plan for XYZ Co‬أﻣﺎم ‪) Name‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 921(.‬ ‫4- ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Text Above‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﺬف ﻋﻼﻣﺔ وﺣﺪة اﻟﻘﺪم )'( اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻌﺪ }‪ {Length‬ﺛﻢ أﺿﻒ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺛﻢ ‪) m‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 921(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 921‬ ‫5- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﺛﻢ ادﺧﻞ '}48082.3*‪) {Length‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 031(.‬ ‫- 37 -‬
  • 72. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﻳﺠﺐ أن ﺗﺘﺠﻨﺐ اﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻣﺮات زاﺋﺪة ﺣﺘﻰ ﻻ ﺗﺪرج أﺳﻄﺮ زاﺋﺪة ﻋﻨﺪ إدﺧﺎل اﻟﻨﺺ اﻟﻌﻠﻮي ‪ Text Above‬أو اﻟﻨﺺ اﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ‬ ‫‪ ،Text Below‬ﻓﻬﺬا ﺳﻴﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻇﻬﻮر ﻓﻲ أﺳﻄﺮ ﻓﺎرﻏﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ اﻟﻨﺺ و اﻟﺨﻂ اﻟﻤﻌﻨﻮن.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 031‬ ‫6- ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Text Below‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﺬف }‪.{Direction‬‬ ‫7- ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Text Below‬ادﺧﻞ ‪ N‬ﺛﻢ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ، و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Data‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Start Northing‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪>> Text Below‬‬ ‫)اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 131(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 131‬ ‫8- ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ اﻟﺴﻄﺮ أﺿﻒ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺛﻢ ادﺧﻞ ‪ E‬ﺛﻢ أﺿﻒ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟـ ‪ Data‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Start Easting‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) >> Text Below‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 231(.‬ ‫- 47 -‬
  • 73. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 231‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻀﻴﻒ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت.‬ ‫9- ﺿﻊ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ اﻟﻔﺄرة ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ اﻟﺴﻄﺮ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ )ﺑﻌﺪ اﻟﻨﺺ}‪ ({Start Easting‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Enter‬‬ ‫01- أدﺧﻞ ‪ N‬ﺛﻢ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Data‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ End Northing‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) >> Text Below‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 331(.‬ ‫11- ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ اﻟﺴﻄﺮ أﺿﻒ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺛﻢ ادﺧــﻞ ‪ E‬ﺛــﻢ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ أﺧﺮى و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Data‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ End Easting‬ﺛﻢ اﺿــﻐﻂ ﻋـﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪) >> Text Below‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 331(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 331‬ ‫21- ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Text Properties‬أدﺧﻞ 5.0 أﻣﺎم اﻟـ ‪ Offset‬و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Style‬اﺧﺘﺮ 001‪ L‬ﺛﻢ ادﺧﻞ ‪ Lot_label‬أﻣﺎم‬ ‫‪) Layer‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 431(.‬ ‫- 57 -‬
  • 74. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 431‬ ‫31- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Units‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Linear‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪) Linear Units‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 531(.‬ ‫41- ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺴﻢ ‪ precision‬ادﺧﻞ 3 أﻣﺎم ‪ Linear‬و ادﺧﻞ 4 أﻣﺎم ‪) Coordinates‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 531(، ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮع‬ ‫إﻟﻰ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Edit Label Styles‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 531‬ ‫51- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Save‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺮار.‬ ‫هﻜﺬا ﻗﺪ أﺗﻤﻤﺖ إﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﺴﻖ ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻠﺨﻄﻮط.‬ ‫ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ ﺧﻂ ‪Labeling a Line‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﻌﻨﻮﻧﺔ ﺧﻂ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﻖ اﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﺬي أﻧﺸﺄﺗﻪ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ.‬ ‫1- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ View‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Named Views‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ View‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ 2 ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺖ ‪ Named‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ Set Current‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫2- ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Labels‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Show Dialog Bar‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺷﺮﻳﻂ اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Style Properties‬‬ ‫3- ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ Line‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Current Label Style‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪.Lot Plan for XYZ Co‬‬ ‫4- ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Labels‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Add Dynamic Labels‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ اﻟﺨﻂ اﻟﺬي أﻣﺎﻣﻚ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) Enter‬اﻧﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 631(.‬ ‫- 67 -‬
  • 75. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 631‬ ‫ﻟﻘﺪ ﻗﻤﺖ اﻵن ﺑﻌﻨﻮﻧﺔ اﻟﺨﻂ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﻖ اﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ، و ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻮق اﻟﺨﻂ اﻟﻄﻮل ﺑﺎﻷﻣﺘﺎر و اﻟﻘﺪم، و ﻣﻦ أﺳﻔﻠﻪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ إﺣﺪاﺛﻲ آﻼ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﺘﻲ اﻟﺒﺪاﻳﺔ و‬ ‫اﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ.‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ إﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﺴﻖ ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﻨﺤﻨﻰ و اﻟﺤﻠﺰون ‪ Curve and Spiral‬ﺑﻨﻔﺲ اﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ اﺗﺒﻌﺖ ﻣﻊ اﻟﺨﻂ.‬ ‫إﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﺴﻖ ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻠﻨﻘﺎط ‪Creating a New Point Label Style‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﺴﻖ ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻠﻨﻘﺎط ﻟﻌﻨﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﻴﺐ أرآﺎن ﻗﻄﻊ اﻷراﺿﻲ ‪.Lot Corner Elevation‬‬ ‫1- ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Labels‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Edit Label Styles‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Edit Label Styles‬‬ ‫2- أﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ Point Label Styles‬و أدﺧﻞ ‪ Lot Corner Elevations‬أﻣﺎم ‪) Name‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 731(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 731‬ ‫3- ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Data‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Elevation‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) >> Text‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 831(.‬ ‫- 77 -‬
  • 76. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 831‬ ‫4- ﺿﻊ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ اﻟﻔﺄرة ﺑﻌﺪ اﻟﻨﺺ }‪ {Elevation‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Enter‬‬ ‫5- ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Data‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Northing‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) >> Text‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 931(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 931‬ ‫6- ﺿﻊ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ اﻟﻔﺄرة ﺑﻌﺪ اﻟﻨﺺ }‪ {Northing‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Enter‬‬ ‫7- ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Data‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Easting‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) >> Text‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 041(.‬ ‫- 87 -‬
  • 77. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 041‬ ‫8- ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Text Properties‬ادﺧﻞ 1 أﻣﺎم اﻟـ ‪ Offset‬ﺛﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Justification‬اﺧﺘﺮ اﻟﺰر اﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮد ﻓﻲ اﻟﺮآﻦ اﻷﻳﻤﻦ‬ ‫اﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ اﻷزرار اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺣﻮل اﻟﺤﺮف ‪) X‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 141(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 141‬ ‫9- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Style‬اﺧﺘﺮ 08‪ L‬ﺛﻢ أدﺧﻞ ‪ Lot_elevation_label‬أﻣﺎم اﻟـ ‪) Layer‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 241(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 241‬ ‫01- أﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Save‬ﺛﻢ أﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫هﻜﺬا ﺗﻜﻮن ﻗﺪ أﺗﻤﻤﺖ إﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﺴﻖ ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻠﻨﻘﺎط.‬ ‫ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪Labeling a Point‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﻌﻨﻮﻧﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪ Label a Point‬و ﺑﻌﺪهﺎ ﺗﻘﻮم ﺑﻐﻠﻖ ﻧﺺ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ‪.Point Marker Text‬‬ ‫1- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ View‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Named Views‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ View‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ 3 ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺖ ‪ Named‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ Set Current‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫- 97 -‬
  • 78. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫2- ﻣﻦ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ Style Properties‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ Point‬و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Current Label Style‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪Lot‬‬ ‫‪) Corner Elevations‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 341(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 341‬ ‫3- اﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ 64 ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر اﻟﻔﺄرة اﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪) Add Dynamic Labels‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 441(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 441‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﻖ اﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ.‬ ‫4- اﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ 64 ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر اﻟﻔﺄرة اﻷﻳﻤﻦ و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Display Properties‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض‬ ‫ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Point Display Properties‬‬ ‫5- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ Text‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈزاﻟﺔ اﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺖ ‪ Visible‬و أﻣﺎم اﻟﺨﻴﺎرات ‪ Number‬و ‪ Elevation‬و‬ ‫‪) Description‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 541( ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺮار.‬ ‫- 08 -‬
  • 79. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 541‬ ‫ﻟﻘﺪ ﻗﻤﺖ اﻵن ﺑﻌﻨﻮﻧﺔ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ و آﺬﻟﻚ إزاﻟﺔ ﻧﺺ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 641(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 641‬ ‫- 18 -‬
  • 80. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫اﻟﺪرس اﻟﺤﺎدي ﻋﺸﺮ: إﻧﺸﺎء ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ و ﺟﺪاول ﻟﻠﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎت ‪Lesson 11: Creating Tag Labels and Object‬‬ ‫‪Tables‬‬ ‫ﻳﺠﺐ أن ﺗﻘﻮم ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﻂ أو اﻟﻤﻨﺤﻨﻰ أو اﻟﺤﻠﺰون ﻗﺒﻞ أن ﺗﻨﺸﺊ ﺟﺪاول ﻣﻦ هﺬﻩ اﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎت، ﻓﺒﻤﺠﺮد أن ﺗﻘﻮم ﺑﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ هﺬﻩ اﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎت، ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺟﺪاول ﻣﻦ هﺬﻩ اﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎت )ﺟﺪاول ﻟﻠﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎت(.‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ هﺬا اﻟﺪرس:‬ ‫1- ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Land Desktop‬‬ ‫2- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ File‬أﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Open‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Open Drawing: Project Based‬‬ ‫إن اﻟﻤﺴﺎر اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻤﺸﺮوع ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﺴﺎر 6002 ‪ C:Land Projects‬ﻓﺈن آﻨﺖ ﻗﺪ ﻏﻴﺮت هﺬا اﻟﻤﺴﺎر أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺼﻴﺐ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻓﻴﺠﺐ أن ﺗﻀﻊ ذﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ اﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎر.‬ ‫3- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋـﻤــﺔ ‪ Project Name‬اﺧـــﺘـــﺮ 1‪ TUTORIAL‬و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Select Project Drawing‬اﺧــــﺘــﺮ‬ ‫‪ Lesson-11.dwg‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫4- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Projects‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Workspaces‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Land Desktop‬ﻟﺘﻌﺮض ﻗﻮاﺋﻢ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Land Desktop‬‬ ‫إﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﺴﻖ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ اﻟﻌﻨﻮﻧﺔ ‪Creating a New Tag Style‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﺴﻖ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ اﻟﻌﻨﻮﻧﺔ و ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺿﻮاﺑﻂ ‪ Parameters‬ﻟﻠﺨﻄﻮط و اﻟﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﺎت.‬ ‫1- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Labels‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Edit Tag Styles‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Edit Tag Label Styles‬‬ ‫2- ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ Line Label Styles‬أدﺧﻞ ‪ Boundary Tags for XYZ Co‬أﻣﺎم ‪) Name‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 741(.‬ ‫3- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Text Properties‬و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Style List‬اﺧﺘﺮ 002‪ L‬ﺛﻢ أدﺧﻞ ‪ Boundary_tags‬أﻣﺎم ‪) Layer‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬ ‫741(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 741‬ ‫4- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ Curve Label Styles‬ﺛﻢ ادﺧﻞ ‪ Boundary Tags for XYZ Co‬أﻣﺎم ‪) Name‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬ ‫841(.‬ ‫5- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Text Properties‬و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Style‬أﺧﺘﺮ 002‪ L‬ﺛﻢ ادﺧﻞ ‪ Boundary_tags‬أﻣﺎم ‪) Layer‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬ ‫841(.‬ ‫- 28 -‬
  • 81. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 841‬ ‫6- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Save‬ﺛﻢ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺮار.‬ ‫هﻜﺬا ﺗﻜﻮن ﻗﺪ أﻧﻬﻴﺖ إﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﺴﻖ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ.‬ ‫ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ اﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎت ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ ‪Labeling Objects with Tags‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﻌﺰل ﻃﺒﻘﺔ اﻟـ ‪ Boundary‬و ﺗﻘﻮم ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ ﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪد ﺧﻄﻮط ‪ Polyline‬اﻟﺤﺪود ﺑﻨﺴﻖ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ اﻟﻌﻨﻮﻧﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ.‬ ‫1- ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﺮ اﻷواﻣﺮ أدﺧﻞ ‪ LAI‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ﺧﻂ اﻟﺤﺪود اﻷزرق ‪ Blue Polyline‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار‬ ‫‪ Layer(s) to isolate‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫2- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Labels‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Show Dialog Bar‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺷﺮﻳﻂ اﻟﺤﻮار ‪) Style Properties‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 941(.‬ ‫3- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ أﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ‪ Label‬ﻟﺘﺘﺤﻮل إﻟﻰ أﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ‪ ،Tag‬ﺛﻢ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ Line‬و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Current Tag Style‬أﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫‪) Boundary Tags for XYZ Co‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 941(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 941‬ ‫4- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ Curve‬و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Current Tag Style‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪) Boundary Tags for XYZ Co‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬ ‫051(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 051‬ ‫- 38 -‬
  • 82. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫5- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Labels‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Add Tag Labels‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ آﻼ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﻌﺪدي اﻟﺨﻄﻮط ﺛﻢ أﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Enter‬‬ ‫6- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ View‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Named Views‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ View‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ 2 ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺖ ‪ Named‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ Set Current‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪) OK‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 151(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 151‬ ‫آﻤﺎ ﺗﺮى ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻢ ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ آﻞ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﻌﺪد اﻟﺨﻄﻮط ‪ Polyline‬ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ.‬ ‫إﻧﺸﺎء ﺟﺪول ﻟﻠﺨﻄﻮط ‪Creating a Line Table‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﺟﺪول ﻟﻠﺨﻄﻮط ﻣﻦ اﻟﺨﻄﻮط اﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ ‪ Tag Label‬ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ، ﻋﻨﺪ إﻧﺸﺎء اﻟﺠﺪول ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻮدﻳﻦ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت )إﺣﺪاﺛﻲ اﻟﺒﺪاﻳﺔ ‪ Y‬و إﺣﺪاﺛﻲ اﻟﺒﺪاﻳﺔ ‪ (X‬إﻟﻰ اﻟﺠﺪول اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ.‬ ‫1- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ View‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Named Views‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ View‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ 3 ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺖ ‪ Named‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ Set Current‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫2- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Labels‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Add Tables‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Line Table‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪Line‬‬ ‫‪.Table Definition‬‬ ‫3- ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Table Title‬و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Text Style‬اﺧﺘﺮ 005‪) L‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 251(.‬ ‫- 48 -‬
  • 83. By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials 152 ‫ﺷﻜﻞ‬ No ‫، أﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﺑﺰر اﻟﻔﺄرة اﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻓﻮق رأس اﻟﻌﻤﻮد اﻟﺮاﺑﻊ و اﻟﻤﺴﻤﻰ‬Column Definition ‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ‬ -4 .(153 ‫ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬Column #4 – Definition ‫ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 251( ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار‬Column .(153 ‫ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬Header ‫ أﻣﺎم‬START NORTHING ‫ أدﺧﻞ‬Column Header Information ‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ‬ -5 Text ‫ ﺛﻢ ﺗﺄآﺪ أن ﻗﺴﻢ‬Add Value ‫ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬Start Northing ‫ اﺧﺘﺮ‬Display Value Information ‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ‬ -6 .(153 ‫{ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬Start Northing} ‫ﻳﻌﺮض‬ .Linear Units ‫ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 351( ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار‬Linear ‫ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬Units ‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ‬ -7 - 85 -
  • 84. By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials 153 ‫ﺷﻜﻞ‬ Column #4 – ‫ ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮع إﻟﻰ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار‬OK ‫ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 451( ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬Coordinate ‫8- أدﺧﻞ 4 أﻣﺎم‬ .Definition 154 ‫ﺷﻜﻞ‬ .Line Table Definition ‫ ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮع إﻟﻰ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار‬OK ‫9- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ No ‫، أﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﺑﺰر اﻟﻔﺄرة اﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻓﻮق رأس اﻟﻌﻤﻮد اﻟﺨﺎﻣﺲ و اﻟﻤﺴﻤﻰ‬Column Definition ‫01- ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ‬ .(155 ‫ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬Column #5 – Definition ‫ ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار‬Column .(155 ‫ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬Header ‫ أﻣﺎم‬START EASTING ‫ أدﺧﻞ‬Column Header Information ‫11- ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ‬ Text ‫ ﺛﻢ ﺗﺄآﺪ أن ﻗﺴﻢ‬Add Value ‫ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬Start Easting ‫ أﺧﺘﺮ‬Display Value Information ‫21- ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ‬ .(155 ‫{ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬Start Easting} ‫ﻳﻌﺮض‬ - 86 -
  • 85. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 551‬ ‫31- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮع إﻟﻰ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Line Table Definition‬‬ ‫41- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Line Table Definition‬‬ ‫51- أﺧﺘﺮ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ إدراج اﻟﺠﺪول إﻟﻴﻬﺎ، اﻟﺮآﻦ اﻷﻳﺴﺮ اﻟﻌﻠﻮي ﻣﻦ اﻟﺠﺪول ﺳﻴﻜﻮن ﻣﻜﺎن اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ )اﻧﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 651(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 651‬ ‫61- ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺘﺎج إﻟﻰ اﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ أو اﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﺮؤﻳﺔ ﺧﻄﻮط اﻟﺠﺪول.‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ هﺎﻣﺔ: ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ اﻟﺠﺪول ﻓﻲ اﻟﺸﻜﻞ 651 ﻋﻤﺎ هﻮ ﻧﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻨﺪك أﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻻﺧﺘﻼف ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎت ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ اﻟﺨﻄﻮط و اﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ اﺧﺘﻴﺎرهﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺗﺒﻌﺎ ﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر.‬ ‫إﻧﺸﺎء ﺟﺪول ﻟﻠﻨﻘﺎط ‪Creating a Point Table‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﺟﺪول ﻟﻠﻨﻘﺎط اﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮدة ﻓﻲ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ و اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ واﺣﺪة.‬ ‫- 78 -‬
  • 86. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫1- ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ‪ Lesson-3.dwg‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﺸﺮوع 2‪.Tutorial‬‬ ‫2- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Labels‬أﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Add Table‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Point Table‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪Points‬‬ ‫)اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 751(.‬ ‫3- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ Point Groups‬و اﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ‪) Control‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 751(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 751‬ ‫4- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ List‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض اﻟﻨﻘﺎط اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺘﻤﻲ إﻟﻰ هﺬﻩ اﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 851(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 851‬ ‫5- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ Summary‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﻋﺪد اﻟﻨﻘﺎط اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺘﻤﻲ إﻟﻰ هﺬﻩ اﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 951(.‬ ‫- 88 -‬
  • 87. By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials 159 ‫ﺷﻜﻞ‬ .(160 ‫ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬Point Table Definition ‫ ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار‬OK ‫6- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ .(160 ‫ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬Text ‫ أﻣﺎم‬MY POINT TABLE ‫ أدﺧﻞ‬Table Title ‫7- ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ‬ ‫ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬No Column ‫ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ رأس اﻟﻌﻤﻮد اﻟﺮاﺑﻊ و اﻟﻤﺴﻤﻰ‬Column Definition ‫8- ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ‬ .Column #4 – Definition ‫061( ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار‬ 160 ‫ﺷﻜﻞ‬ .(161 ‫ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬Header ‫ أﻣﺎم‬NORTHING ‫ ادﺧﻞ‬Column Header Information ‫9- ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ‬ Text ‫، ﺛﻢ ﺗﺄآﺪ أن اﻟﻘﺴﻢ‬Add Value ‫ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬Northing ‫ اﺧﺘﺮ‬Display Value Information ‫01- ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ‬ .(161 ‫{ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬Northing} ‫ﻳﻌﺮض‬ - 89 -
  • 88. By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials 161 ‫ﺷﻜﻞ‬ .Point Table Definition ‫ ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮع إﻟﻰ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار‬OK ‫11- أﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ )اﻧﻈﺮ‬No Column ‫ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ رأس اﻟﻌﻤﻮد اﻟﺨﺎﻣﺲ و اﻟﻤﺴﻤﺎة‬Column Definition ‫21- ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ‬ .Column #5 – Definition ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 261( ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار‬ 162 ‫ﺷﻜﻞ‬ .(163 ‫ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬Header ‫ أﻣﺎم‬EASTING ‫ ادﺧﻞ‬Column Header Information ‫31- ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ‬ - 90 -
  • 89. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫41- ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Display Value Information‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Easting‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،Add Value‬ﺛﻢ ﺗﺄآﺪ أن اﻟﻘﺴﻢ ‪ Text‬ﻳﻌﺮض‬ ‫}‪) {Easting‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 361(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 361‬ ‫51- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮع إﻟﻰ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Point Table Definition‬‬ ‫61- ﻣﻦ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ Point Table Definition‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫71- أﺧﺘﺮ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ إدراج اﻟﺠﺪول إﻟﻴﻬﺎ، اﻟﺮآﻦ اﻷﻳﺴﺮ اﻟﻌﻠﻮي ﺳﻴﻜﻮن ﻣﻜﺎن اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 461(.‬ ‫81- ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺘﺎج إﻟﻰ اﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ أو اﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﺮؤﻳﺔ ﺧﻄﻮط اﻟﺠﺪول.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 461‬ ‫آﻤﺎ ﺗﺮى ﻓﻲ اﻟﺠﺪول ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻢ ﻋﺮض اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﻴﻦ 742 و 857 ﻷﻧﻬﻤﺎ ﻣﻮﺟﻮدﺗﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ، اﻟﻨﻘﺎط اﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮدة ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﻋﺪة اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت و ﻟﻜﻦ ﻻ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ إدراﺟﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺠﺪول.‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ )إﻋﺎدة ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ( ﺟﺪول ‪Updating (Re-drawing) an Object Table‬‬ ‫إن أﻣﺮ ‪ Re-Draw Table‬ﻳﺠﻌﻠﻚ ﺗﺤﺪث ﺗﻠﻚ اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑـﺨﻂ ‪ Line‬أو ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻰ ‪ Curve‬أو ﺣﻠﺰون ‪ ،Spiral‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ اﻟﻤﺜﺎل‬ ‫ﻟﻮ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﺟﺪول ﻟﻠﺨﻄﻮط ‪ Line Table‬و اﻟﺬي ﻳﻌﺮض ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت 02 ﺧﻂ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺤﺬف ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﻦ هﺬﻩ اﻟﺨﻄﻮط ﻣﻦ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻓﺈن‬ ‫اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﻤﻌﺮوﺿﺔ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺠﺪول ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ، ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻷﻣﺮ ‪ Re-Draw Table‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﺠﺪول ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ.‬ ‫1- ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ اﻟﻤﺸﺮوع 1‪ Tutorial‬و ﻣﻨﻪ اﻓﺘﺢ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ‪.Lesson-11.dwg‬‬ ‫2- ﻓﻲ درس ﺳﺎﺑﻖ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﺟﺪول ﻟﻠﺨﻄﻮط )إن ﻟﻢ ﺗﺠﺪ ﺟﺪول ﻟﻠﺨﻄﻮط ﻓﻲ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻓﺎﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات ﻓﻲ اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻹﻧﺸﺎء‬ ‫ﺟﺪول ﻟﻠﺨﻄﻮط(.‬ ‫3- ﻣﻦ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈزاﻟﺔ أي ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺧﻄﻮط و ﻻﺣﻆ أن اﻟﺠﺪول ﻣﺎزال ﻳﻌﺮض ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت هﺬﻩ اﻟﺨﻄﻮط.‬ ‫4- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Labels‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Edit Tables‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪.Re-Draw Table‬‬ ‫- 19 -‬
  • 90. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫5- اﺧﺘﺮ اﻟﺠﺪول اﻟﻤﺮاد ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺜﻪ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ،Enter‬ﻻﺣﻆ أن اﻟﺠﺪول ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺜﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ، و ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺣﺬف ﺻﻔﻮف اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺨﻄﻮط اﻟﻤﺤﺬوﻓﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ.‬ ‫إن اﻷﻣﺮ ‪ Re-Draw Table‬ﻳﺤﺪث آﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎت اﻟﻤﻌﺮوﺿﺔ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺠﺪول ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ اﻟﻤﺜﺎل ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ إﺣﺪاﺛﻲ اﻟﺸﻤﺎل أو اﻟﺸﺮق‬ ‫‪ Northing or Easting‬ﻟﻜﺎﺋﻦ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺠﺪول ﻓﺈن اﻷﻣﺮ ‪ Re-Draw Table‬ﻳﻘﻮم ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ هﺬﻩ اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت.‬ ‫ﻓﻬﻢ اﻟﺠﺪول آﻜﺎﺋﻦ ‪Understanding Table Objects‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﻮف ﺗﻌﺮف اﻟﻔﺮق ﺑﻴﻦ إﻧﺸﺎء اﻟﺠﺪاول ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎ اﻟﺨﻴﺎر ‪ Create Table Object‬ﻣﻦ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪Table‬‬ ‫‪ Definition‬و اﻟﺠﺪاول اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺸﺄ دون اﺳﺘﺨﺪام هﺬا اﻟﺨﻴﺎر.‬ ‫1- ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ اﻟﻤﺸﺮوع 1‪ Tutorial‬و ﻣﻨﻪ اﻓﺘﺢ اﻟﻤﻠﻒ ‪.Lesson-11.dwg‬‬ ‫2- ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﺟﺪول ﻟﻠﺨﻄﻮط و ﺗﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪم اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ‪) Create Table Object‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ آﻴﻔﻴﺔ إﻧﺸﺎء ﺟﺪول ﻟﻠﺨﻄﻮط اﺗﺒﻊ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎت ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ(، و أدﺧﻞ ‪ NOT TABLE OBJECT‬ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﻨﺺ أﻣﺎم ‪) Text‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ‪(Table Title‬‬ ‫)اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 561(، ﺛﻢ أدرج هﺬا اﻟﺠﺪول إﻟﻰ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 661(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 561‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 661‬ ‫3- ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﺟﺪول ﺁﺧﺮ ﻟﻠﺨﻄﻮط و ﻟﻜﻦ هﺬﻩ اﻟﻤﺮة أﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Create Table Object‬ﻣﻦ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪Line Table‬‬ ‫‪) Definition‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ آﻴﻔﻴﺔ إﻧﺸﺎء ﺟﺪول ﻟﻠﺨﻄﻮط اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎت ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ(،ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Table Object‬أدﺧﻞ ‪TABLE‬‬ ‫‪ OBJECT‬أﻣﺎم ‪ Layer‬و أدﺧﻞ ‪ IS TABLE OBJECT‬ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﻨﺺ أﻣﺎم ‪) Text‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ‪) (Table Title‬اﻧﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 761(.‬ ‫4- أدرج هﺬا اﻟﺠﺪول إﻟﻰ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺑﺠﺎﻧﺐ اﻟﺠﺪول اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ أو ﻓﻮﻗﻪ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 861(.‬ ‫- 29 -‬
  • 91. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 761‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 861‬ ‫5- ﻓﻲ اﻟﺠﺪول اﻟﻤﺴﻤﻰ ‪ NOT TABLE OBJECT‬أﺧﺘﺮ أي ﻣﻦ ﺧﻄﻮط ﺷﺒﻜﺔ اﻟﺠﺪول. ﻻﺣﻆ أن اﻟﺨﻂ اﻟﺬي ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻴﻪ هﻮ ﻓﻘﻂ اﻟﺬي ﺗﻢ اﺧﺘﻴﺎرﻩ و ﻟﻴﺲ اﻟﺠﺪول ﺑﺄآﻤﻠﻪ و ﻟﻮ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ هﺬا اﻟﺨﻂ ﺳﻴﺘﺤﺮك ﺑﻤﻔﺮدﻩ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 961(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 961‬ ‫6- ﻓﻲ اﻟﺠﺪول اﻟﻤﺴﻤﻰ ‪ IS TABLE OBJECT‬أﺧﺘﺮ أي ﺧﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻄﻮط اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻟﻠﺠﺪول و ﻻﺣﻆ اﻧﻪ ﺗﻢ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﺠﺪول ﺑﺄآﻤﻠﻪ‬ ‫و ﻟﻴﺲ اﻟﺨﻂ اﻟﺬي ﺿﻐﻄﺖ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ و إن ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ هﺬا اﻟﺨﻂ ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﺘﺤﺮك اﻟﺠﺪول ﻣﻦ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻪ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 071(.‬ ‫- 39 -‬
  • 92. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 071‬ ‫7- ﻓﻲ اﻟﺠﺪول اﻟﻤﺴﻤﻰ ‪ IS TABLE OBJECT‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ هﺬا اﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺠﺪاول أﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻤﺎﺳﻚ اﻷﻳﺴﺮ اﻟﻌﻠﻮي ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ‬ ‫اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﺠﺪول ﺑﺄآﻤﻠﻪ و اﺳﺤﺐ اﻟﺠﺪول إﻟﻰ اﻟﻤﻜﺎن اﻟﺬي ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 171(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 171‬ ‫8- ﻓﻲ اﻟﺠﺪول اﻟﻤﺴﻤﻰ ‪ NOT TABLE OBJECT‬أﺧﺘﺮ اﻟﺠﺪول ﺑﺄآﻤﻠﻪ ﺳﻮاء ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ اﻟﺨﻴﺎر ‪ Window‬أو ‪Cross‬‬ ‫‪ ،Selection‬وﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ هﺬا اﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺠﺪاول ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ اﻟﺠﺪول ﻣﺎزال ﻣﺨﺘﺎرا ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ أي ﺟﺰء ﻣﻨﻪ ﻣﻊ اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮار ﻓﻲ‬ ‫اﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺛﻢ أﺳﺤﺒﻪ إﻟﻰ اﻟﻤﻜﺎن اﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﺬي ﺗﺮﻳﺪ إدراﺟﻪ ﻓﻴﻪ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 271(.‬ ‫- 49 -‬
  • 93. By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials 172 ‫ﺷﻜﻞ‬ - 95 -
  • 94. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫اﻟﺪرس اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﺸﺮ: اﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﻧﻤﻮذج اﻷرض‪Lesson 12: Working with the Terrain Model Explorer‬‬ ‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪم ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﻧﻤﻮذج اﻷرض ‪ Terrain Model Explorer‬ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﻤﻮذج رﻗﻤﻲ ﻟﻸرض ‪Digital Terrain Model‬‬ ‫)‪ (DTMs‬ﻣﻦ أي ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط و ﺧﻄﻮط اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر )ﺧﻄﻮط اﻟﻤﻨﺴﻮب اﻟﻤﺘﺴﺎوي( و ﺧﻄﻮط اﻻﻧﻜﺴﺎر و ﺣﺪود اﻟﺴﻄﺢ.‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ هﺬا اﻟﺪرس:‬ ‫1- ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Land Desktop‬‬ ‫2- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ File‬أﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Open‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Open Drawing: Project Based‬‬ ‫إن اﻟﻤﺴﺎر اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻤﺸﺮوع ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﺴﺎر 6002 ‪ C:Land Projects‬ﻓﺈن آﻨﺖ ﻗﺪ ﻏﻴﺮت هﺬا اﻟﻤﺴﺎر أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺼﻴﺐ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻓﻴﺠﺐ أن ﺗﻀﻊ ذﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ اﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎر.‬ ‫3- ﻣــﻦ ﻗﺎﺋـﻤـﺔ ‪ Project Name‬اﺧـــﺘــــﺮ 1‪ TUTORIAL‬و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Select Project Drawing‬اﺧــــﺘــﺮ‬ ‫‪ Lesson-12.dwg‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫4- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Projects‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Workspaces‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Land Desktop‬ﻟﺘﻌﺮض ﻗﻮاﺋﻢ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Land Desktop‬‬ ‫إﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﻟﺴﻄﺢ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ‪Creating a New Surface Folder‬‬ ‫1- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Terrain Model Explorer‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﻧﺎﻓﺬة ‪.Terrain Model Explorer‬‬ ‫2- اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Terrain‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر اﻟﻔﺄرة اﻷﻳﻤﻦ و أﺧﺘﺮ ‪) Create New Surface‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 371(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 371‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ إﻋﻄﺎء اﻻﺳﻢ 1‪ Surface‬ﻟﻠﺴﻄﺢ اﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ و ﺳﻴﺘﻢ إﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺤﺖ اﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ‪) Terrain‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 471(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 471‬ ‫- 69 -‬
  • 95. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫3- أﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ 1‪ Surface‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت اﻟﺴﻄﺢ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺠﺰء اﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬة )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 471(.‬ ‫4- ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻤﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ )+( ﺑﺠﺎﻧﺐ اﺳﻢ اﻟﺴﻄﺢ آﻤﺎ هﻮ ﻣﺸﺎر إﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺸﻜﻞ 471 ﻟﺘﺴـﺘﻌـــﺮض اﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ‪TIN‬‬ ‫‪) Data‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 571(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 571‬ ‫5- اﺧﺘﺮ 1‪ Surface‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر اﻟﻔﺄرة اﻷﻳﻤﻦ و اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Rename‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪Rename Surface‬‬ ‫)اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 671(.‬ ‫6- أدﺧﻞ 1‪ Area‬ﺗﺤﺖ ‪ New surface name‬ﺛﻢ أﺿﻐﻂ ‪) OK‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 671(.‬ ‫اﻵن أﻧﺖ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺪ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﺘﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﻹﻧﺸﺎء اﻟﺴﻄﺢ اﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 671‬ ‫إﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﻣﻦ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ‪Adding Point Data‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﺎط ﻣﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ.‬ ‫1- ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻤﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ 1‪ Area‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض اﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ‪.TIN data‬‬ ‫2- ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر ‪ Point Groups‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر اﻟﻔﺄرة اﻷﻳﻤﻦ و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Add Point Group‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق‬ ‫اﻟﺤﻮار ‪) Add Point Group‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 771(.‬ ‫3- ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Point group name‬اﺧﺘﺮ 1‪ Area‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮع إﻟﻰ ‪) Terrain Model Explorer‬اﻧﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 771(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 771‬ ‫- 79 -‬
  • 96. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض اﺳﻢ اﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺠﺰء اﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺎﻓﺬة ‪) Terrain Model Explorer‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 871(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 871‬ ‫إﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﻣﻦ ﺧﻄﻮط آﻨﺘﻮر ‪Adding Contour Data‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﺧﻄﻮط اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر ﻣﻦ ﺧﻄﻮط آﻨﺘﻮر ﻣﻮﺟﻮدة ﻓﻲ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ.‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ هﺎﻣﺔ: ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ إﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺧﻄﻮط اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر ﻹﻧﺸﺎء اﻟﺴﻄﺢ و ﻓﻲ ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﻻﺣﻖ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر ﻣﻦ اﻟﺴﻄﺢ اﻟﺬي أﻧﺸﺊ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ و ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﺪم اﻟﺨﻠﻂ ﺑﻴﻦ هﺬﻳﻦ اﻟﻤﻔﻬﻮﻣﻴﻦ، ﻓﻜﻤﺎ ﻗﻠﻨﺎ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺎ أن اﻟﺴﻄﺢ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ إﻧﺸﺎؤﻩ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط أو ﺧﻄﻮط اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر ﻓﺈن‬ ‫آﻨﺖ ﺗﻤﻠﻚ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط و أﻧﺸﺄت ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﺧﻄﻮط آﻨﺘﻮر ﻣﻦ هﺬا اﻟﺴﻄﺢ ﻓﻼ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ هﺬﻩ اﻟﺨﻄﻮط )ﺧﻄﻮط‬ ‫اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر( اﻟﻨﺎﺗﺠﺔ إﻟﻰ اﻟﺴﻄﺢ )ﻓﻬﻲ ﻧﺎﺗﺠﺔ أو أﻧﺸﺄت ﺑﻌﺪ إﻧﺸﺎء اﻟﺴﻄﺢ(، أﻣﺎ ﻟﻮ آﻨﺖ ﺗﻤﻠﻚ ﺧﻄﻮط آﻨﺘﻮر و ﻻ ﺗﻤﻠﻚ ﻧﻘﺎط ﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺑﻨﺎء ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻦ هﺬﻩ اﻟﺨﻄﻮط )ﺧﻄﻮط اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر( و ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻴﺎ ﻟﻦ ﺗﻘﻮم ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﺧﻄﻮط آﻨﺘﻮر ﻣﻦ اﻟﺴﻄﺢ اﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻓﻲ هﺬﻩ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﺄﻧﺖ ﺗﻤﻠﻜﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ‬ ‫و ﻟﻜﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ هﺬا اﻟﺴﻄﺢ ﺣﺴﺎب اﻟﻜﻤﻴﺎت و رﺳﻢ اﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎت.‬ ‫1- ﻣﻦ ‪ Terrain Model Explorer‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ 1‪ Area‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Contours‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر اﻟﻔﺄرة اﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض‬ ‫ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Contour Weeding‬‬ ‫2- أﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﺘﻘﺒﻞ اﻟﻘﻴﻢ اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻴﺔ ﻟـ ‪ Weeding factors‬و ‪) Supplementing factors‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 971(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 971‬ ‫3- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﻘﺒﻞ اﻟﺨﻴﺎر اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ‪ Layer‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ أي ﺧﻂ آﻨﺘﻮر ﻣﻦ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 081(.‬ ‫- 89 -‬
  • 97. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 081‬ ‫4- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺮار ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Enter‬ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى ﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر.‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر ﻓﻲ اﻟﺠﺰء اﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺎﻓﺬة ‪) Terrain Model Explorer‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 181(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 181‬ ‫إﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﺧﻂ اﻧﻜﺴﺎر ﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﺎط ‪Adding Breakline Data from Points‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﺧﻂ اﻧﻜﺴﺎر ﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﺎط و ﻣﺘﻌﺪد ﺧﻄﻮط ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ اﻷﺑﻌﺎد ‪ 2D Polyline‬و ﻣﺘﻌﺪد ﺧﻄﻮط ﺛﻼﺛﻲ اﻷﺑﻌﺎد‬ ‫‪ 3D Polyline‬ﻣﻮﺟﻮدﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺳﻢ، ﻗﻢ أوﻻ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﺧﻂ اﻧﻜﺴﺎر ‪ Breakline‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺧﻂ اﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ‪ Centerline‬ﻟﻘﺎع اﻟﻨﻬﺮ‬ ‫‪.Streambed‬‬ ‫1- ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻧﺎﻓﺬة ‪ Terrain Model Explorer‬ﺟﺎﻧﺒﺎ.‬ ‫2- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ View‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Named Views‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ View‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ 2 ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺖ ‪ Named‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ Set Current‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫3- أدﺧﻞ ‪ LAI‬ﺛﻢ أﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Enter‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ إﺣﺪى ﻧﻘﺎط ﺧﻂ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﻗﺎع اﻟﻨﻬﺮ ‪) Streambed Centerline‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰهﺎ ﺑﻠﻮن‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺎت اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ‪ Point Marker‬و هﻮ اﻷزرق اﻟﻔﺎﺗﺢ ‪ Cyan‬و وﺻﻔﻬﺎ ‪ Description‬و هﻮ ‪) Strm Bed‬اﻧﻈﺮ إﻟﻰ‬ ‫اﻟﻨﻘﺎط اﻟﻤﺸﺎر إﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺸﻜﻞ 281((. ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪Layer(s) to isolate‬‬ ‫- 99 -‬
  • 98. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 281‬ ‫4- ﺗﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮض ‪ STREAM_PNTS‬ﻓﻲ اﻟﺼﻨﺪوق ‪ Enter Item‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﺘﻌﺰل اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ اﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎرة )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬ ‫381(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 381‬ ‫5- ﻣﻦ ﻧﺎﻓﺬة ‪ Terrain Model Explorer‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Breaklines‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر اﻟﻔﺄرة اﻷﻳﻤﻦ و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪Define‬‬ ‫‪.by Point‬‬ ‫6- أﺧﺘﺮ أول ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎع اﻟﻨﻬﺮ ﺛﻢ أﺧﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻣﻦ أﺳﻔﻞ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ و ﻋﻨﺪ اﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪Enter‬‬ ‫)اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 481(.‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ هﺎﻣﺔ: ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ رﻗﻢ 1952 و اﻟﻤﺤﺎﻃﺔ ﺑﺪاﺋﺮة ﺣﻤﺮاء ﻓﻲ اﻟﺸﻜﻞ 481 ﺣﻴﺚ أﻧﻬﺎ ﻻ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺧﻂ اﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﻟﻘﺎع اﻟﻨﻬﺮ.‬ ‫- 001 -‬
  • 99. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺨﺘﺮ هﺬﻩ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ اﻟﺒﺪاﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 481‬ ‫7- أدﺧﻞ ‪ Streambed‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻒ.‬ ‫8- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ Terrain Breaklines‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ No‬ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺮار و ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت‬ ‫ﺧﻂ اﻻﻧﻜﺴﺎر.‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ إﻧﺸﺎء ﺧﻂ اﻻﻧﻜﺴﺎر و ﺗﻜﻮن آﻞ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﻗﻤﺔ أو رأس ‪ Vertex‬ﻟﻬﺬا اﻟﺨﻂ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 581(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 581‬ ‫- 101 -‬
  • 100. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫آﻤﺎ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﺧﻂ اﻻﻧﻜﺴﺎر ﻓﻲ اﻟﺠﺰء اﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬة ‪) Terrain Model Explorer‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 681(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 681‬ ‫إﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﺧﻂ اﻧﻜﺴﺎر ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﻌﺪد ﺧﻄﻮط ﺛﻼﺛﻲ اﻷﺑﻌﺎد ‪Adding Breakline Data from 3D Polylines‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺧﻂ اﻧﻜﺴﺎر ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﻌﺪد ﺧﻄﻮط ﺛﻼﺛﻲ اﻷﺑﻌﺎد و اﻟﺬي ﻳﻌﺮف ﺣﺎﻓﺔ رﺻﻴﻒ اﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ ‪Roadway‬‬ ‫‪.Edge of Pavement‬‬ ‫1- ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﺮ اﻷواﻣﺮ أدﺧﻞ ‪ LOA‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﻌﻴﺪ آﻞ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺎت ‪ Layers‬ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى ﻟﻠﻈﻬﻮر ﻓﻲ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ.‬ ‫2- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ View‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Named Views‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ View‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ 3 ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺖ ‪ Named‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ Set Current‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫3- أدﺧﻞ ‪ LAI‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Enter‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ﺧﻂ اﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ )ﻣﺸﺎر إﻟﻴﻪ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺸﻜﻞ 781( ﺛﻢ أﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق‬ ‫اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Layer(s) to isolate‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 781‬ ‫4- ﺗﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮض ‪ EOP_3D‬ﻓﻲ اﻟﺼﻨﺪوق ‪ Enter Item‬ﺛﻢ أﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) OK‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 881(.‬ ‫- 201 -‬
  • 101. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 881‬ ‫5- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ View‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Named Views‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ View‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ 1 ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺖ ‪ Named‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ Set Current‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫6- ﻣﻦ ﻧﺎﻓﺬة ‪ Terrain Model Explorer‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Breaklines‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺰر اﻟﻔﺄرة اﻷﻳﻤﻦ و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ أﺧﺘﺮ ‪Define by‬‬ ‫‪.Polyline‬‬ ‫7- أدﺧﻞ ‪ Existing_Road_EOP‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻒ ﺛﻢ أﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Enter‬ﺛﻢ أﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺘﻌﺪد اﻟﺨﻄﻮط ﻣﻦ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ و اﻟﺬي ﻳﻤﺜﻞ ﺣﺎﻓﺔ اﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ‪ ،Crossing Box‬و ﺗﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر آﻞ ﻣﺘﻌﺪدي اﻟﺨﻄﻮط.‬ ‫8- أﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ Terrain Breaklines‬و ﻣﻨﻪ أﺧﺘﺮ ‪ No‬ﻟﻌﺪم ﺣﺬف أي ﺧﻄﻮط اﻧﻜﺴﺎر‬ ‫ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ و ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺮار و ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﺧﻂ اﻻﻧﻜﺴﺎر.‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﺧﻄﻮط اﻻﻧﻜﺴﺎر ﻓﻲ اﻟﺠﺰء اﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬة ‪) Terrain Model Explorer‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 981(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 981‬ ‫إﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺧﻂ اﻧﻜﺴﺎر ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﻌﺪد ﺧﻄﻮط ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ اﻷﺑﻌﺎد ‪Adding Breakline Data from 2D Polylines‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺧﻂ اﻧﻜﺴﺎر ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﻌﺪد ﺧﻄﻮط ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ اﻷﺑﻌﺎد ‪ 2D Polylines‬و اﻟﺬي ﺗﻢ رﺳﻤﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺣﺎﻓﺔ رﺻﻴﻒ اﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ‬ ‫‪ Roadway edge of pavement‬و اﻟﻘﻨﺎة ‪ Ditch‬و أرض أﺳﺎس اﻟﺴﻜﺔ اﻟﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪.Railway Bed‬‬ ‫1- ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﺮ اﻷواﻣﺮ أدﺧﻞ ‪ LOA‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﻌﻴﺪ آﻞ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺎت ‪ Layers‬ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى ﻟﻠﻈﻬﻮر ﻓﻲ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ.‬ ‫2- أدﺧﻞ ‪ LAI‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Enter‬ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Layer(s) to isolate‬‬ ‫3- ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Layers‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ 2D_Breaklines‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) OK‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 091( ﻟﺘﻌﺰل اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ‪.2D_Breaklines‬‬ ‫- 301 -‬
  • 102. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 091‬ ‫4- ﻣﻦ ﻧﺎﻓﺬة اﻟـ ‪ Terrain Model Explorer‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Breaklines‬و اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر اﻟﻔﺄرة اﻷﻳﻤﻦ و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫‪.Proximity by Polylines‬‬ ‫5- أدﺧﻞ ‪ Misc_Topo‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻒ ‪ Description‬ﺛﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟـ ‪ Cross Box‬أﺧﺘﺮ آﻞ ﻣﺘﻌﺪدي اﻟﺨﻄﻮط ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ اﻷﺑﻌﺎد ‪2D‬‬ ‫‪ Polylines‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ.‬ ‫6- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﺑﻌﺪ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر آﻞ اﻟﺨﻄﻮط ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ Terrain Breaklines‬ﺛﻢ أﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪No‬‬ ‫ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺮار )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 191(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 191‬ ‫7- ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ رﺳﺎﻟﺔ أﺧﺮى إﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ، أﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Yes‬ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺮار و ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﻟﺨﻄﻮط اﻻﻧﻜﺴﺎر و ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮر هﺬﻩ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى أﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Yes‬أﻳﻀﺎ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 291(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 291‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﺧﻄﻮط اﻻﻧﻜﺴﺎر ﻓﻲ اﻟﺠﺰء اﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬة ‪) Terrain Model Explorer‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 391(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 391‬ ‫- 401 -‬
  • 103. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫إﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﺣﺪود اﻟﺴﻄﺢ ‪Adding Surface Boundary Data‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻀﻴﻒ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﺤﺪود ﻟﻠﺴﻄﺢ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺪ ﻣﻮﺟﻮد ﻓﻲ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ.‬ ‫1- ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﺮ اﻷواﻣﺮ أدﺧﻞ ‪ LOA‬ﻻﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎع آﻞ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺎت إﻟﻰ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى.‬ ‫2- ﻣﻦ ﻧﺎﻓﺬة ‪ Terrain Model Explorer‬أﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Boundaries‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر اﻟﻔﺄرة اﻷﻳﻤﻦ و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪Add‬‬ ‫‪.Boundary Definition‬‬ ‫3- ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﺘﻌﺪد اﻟﺨﻄﻮط اﻷﺑﻴﺾ )اﻟﻤﺸﺎر إﻟﻴﻪ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺸﻜﻞ 491( و اﻟﺬي ﻳﺤﻴﻂ ﺑﺴﻄﺢ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ اﻷرض، ﺛﻢ أدﺧﻞ 1‪ Area‬ﻟﻼﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Enter‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 491‬ ‫4- ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Enter‬ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى ﻟﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﻧﻤﻂ اﻟﺤﺪ ‪ Boundary Type‬اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ و هﻮ ﺧﺎرﺟﻲ ‪.Outer‬‬ ‫5- ادﺧﻞ ‪ No‬ﻟـ ‪ making breaklines along edges‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﻨﻬﻲ اﻷﻣﺮ و ﺗﺮﺟﻊ إﻟﻰ ﻧﺎﻓﺬة ‪Terrain‬‬ ‫‪.Model Explorer‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺪ ﺧﻄﻮط اﻻﻧﻜﺴﺎر ‪ Breaklines‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﻮل اﻟﺤﺎﻓﺔ ﻓﺈن اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت داﺧﻞ ﺣﺪ اﻟﺴﻄﺢ ‪ Surface Boundary‬هﻲ اﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺿﻊ ﻓﻲ اﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎر ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﻨﺎء اﻟﺴﻄﺢ.‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﺣﺪود اﻟﺴﻄﺢ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺠﺰء اﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺎﻓﺬة اﻟـ ‪) Terrain Model Explorer‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 591(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 591‬ ‫- 501 -‬
  • 104. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺑﻨﺎء ﺳﻄﺢ ‪Building a Surface‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺒﻨﺎء ﺳﻄﺢ ‪ Build a Surface‬ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط و ﺧﻄﻮط اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر و ﺧﻄﻮط اﻻﻧﻜﺴﺎر و ﺣﺪود اﻟﺴﻄﺢ.‬ ‫1- ﻣﻦ ﻧﺎﻓﺬة ‪ Terrain Model Explorer‬أﺧﺘﺮ 1‪ Area‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر اﻟﻔﺄرة اﻷﻳﻤﻦ و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪Build‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار 1‪.Build Area‬‬ ‫2- أدﺧﻞ 1‪ Area‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻒ ) اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 691(.‬ ‫3- ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Surface Data Options‬أزل اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﻦ أﻣﺎم ‪ Use point file data‬و ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر ‪Minimize flat‬‬ ‫‪) triangles resulting from contour data‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 691(.‬ ‫4- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ آﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﺴﻄﺢ و ﺑﻨﺎء اﻟﺴﻄﺢ.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 691‬ ‫5- ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ Build Progress‬ﺛﻢ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ رﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻔﻴﺪ اﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﺒﻨﺎء اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) OK‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬ ‫791(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 791‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﺑﻨﺎء اﻟﺴﻄﺢ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺠﺰء اﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺎﻓﺬة ‪ ،Terrain Model Explorer‬و اﻵن ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻧﻤﻮذج ﻟﻸرض ﺗﻢ ﺑﻨﺎؤﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط و ﺧﻄﻮط اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر و ﺧﻄﻮط اﻻﻧﻜﺴﺎر ﻣﻤﺜﻼ ﻇﺮوف اﻷرض اﻟﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 891(.‬ ‫- 601 -‬
  • 105. By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials 198 ‫ﺷﻜﻞ‬ .‫ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻐﻠﻘﻬﺎ‬Terrain Model Explorer ‫6- ﻋﻨﺪ اﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﻣﺸﺎهﺪة اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﻓﻲ ﻧﺎﻓﺬة‬ - 107 -
  • 106. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫اﻟﺪرس اﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ ﻋﺸﺮ: ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ اﻷﺳﻄﺢ ‪Lesson 13: Editing Surfaces‬‬ ‫إن دﻗﺔ ﻧﻤﻮذج اﻟﺴﻄﺢ اﻟﻨﺎﺗﺠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﺜﻠﻴﺚ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ دﻗﺔ اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ، ﻓﺈن آﺎﻧﺖ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﻴﺐ )ﻓﻲ اﻷرﺟﺢ ﺗﻜﻮن ﻧﻘﺎط(‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺛﺮة و ﻏﻴﺮ آﺜﻴﻔﺔ و ﺧﻄﻮط اﻻﻧﻜﺴﺎر ﻧﺎﻗﺼﺔ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ أﻓﻀﻞ اﻟﺤﺎﻻت ﻧﻤﻮذج ﻏﺎﻣﺾ أو ﻣﻠﺘﺒﺲ، ﺣﺘﻰ و إن آﺎﻧﺖ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﻴﺐ‬ ‫آﺜﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻤﻦ اﻟﻤﻬﻢ اﻟﺘﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ أن ﻧﻤﻮذج اﻟﺴﻄﺢ ﻳﻤﺜﻞ ﻇﺮوف اﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ.‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺪرس ﺑﻌﺾ اﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺎت ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ اﻟﺪﻗﺔ )ﻣﺬآﻮرة ﻓﻲ اﻟﺪرس( ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ اﻟﺴﻄﺢ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ اﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺎت أﺧﺮى و هﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺬآﻮرة ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺪرس.‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ هﺬا اﻟﺪرس:‬ ‫1- ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Land Desktop‬‬ ‫2- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ File‬أﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Open‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Open Drawing: Project Based‬‬ ‫إن اﻟﻤﺴﺎر اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻤﺸﺮوع ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﺴﺎر 6002 ‪ C:Land Projects‬ﻓﺈن آﻨﺖ ﻗﺪ ﻏﻴﺮت هﺬا اﻟﻤﺴﺎر أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺼﻴﺐ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻓﻴﺠﺐ أن ﺗﻀﻊ ذﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ اﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎر.‬ ‫3- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Project Name‬اﺧــﺘــﺮ 1‪ TUTORIAL‬و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋــﻤــﺔ ‪ Select Project Drawing‬اﺧـــﺘــــﺮ‬ ‫‪ Lesson-13.dwg‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫4- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Projects‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Workspaces‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Land Desktop‬ﻟﺘﻌﺮض ﻗﻮاﺋﻢ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Land Desktop‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺸﺎآﻞ اﻟﺘﺜﻠﻴﺚ ‪Identifying Triangulation Problems‬‬ ‫إن ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ اﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ أوﻻ ﺷﻲء أﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻻ ﻏﻨﻰ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ اﻟﻤﺸﺎآﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻮذج اﻟﺴﻄﺢ، و ﻣﻘﺎرﻧﺔ رﺳﻤﻚ ﻣﻊ ﺻﻮر ﻟﻠﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺷﻲء ﻣﻔﻴﺪ أو ﺣﺘﻰ‬ ‫ﻟﻮ آﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ اﻟﻮﺻﻮل ﻟﻠﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﻓﻴﻜﻮن أﻓﻀﻞ.‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮق ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ اﻟﻤﺸﺎآﻞ ﺑﻨﻤﻮذج اﻟﺴﻄﺢ أن ﺗﻨﻈﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻄﻮط اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر و ﺗﺮى أﻳﻦ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ اﻟﻈﻮاهﺮ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺧﻄﻮط اﻻرﺗﻔﺎع ‪Ridgelines‬‬ ‫)ﻣﺜﻞ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺗﻼل أو ﺟﺒﺎل( أو ﻗﻴﻌﺎن اﻷﻧﻬﺎر ‪ Streambeds‬ﻓﻬﻲ ﺑﺎﻷهﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻤﺜﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻨﻤﻮذج و ﺧﻄﻮط اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر اﻟﺒﺎرزة و اﻟﻐﻴﺮ هﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺪل ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺸﺎآﻞ اﻟﺘﺜﻠﻴﺚ، و اﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ اﻷﺧﺮى ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺸﺎآﻞ اﻟﺘﺜﻠﻴﺚ هﻲ أن ﺗﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼل ﻗﻄﺎﻋﺎت ﺗﻤﺮ ﺑﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺣﻴﻮﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﻟﻠﺘﺄآﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺗﻤﺜﻴﻞ ﻧﻤﻮذج اﻟﺴﻄﺢ.‬ ‫1- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ View‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Named Views‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ View‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ 2 ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺖ ‪ Named‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ Set Current‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫2- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Set Current Surface‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ ،Select Surface‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪ Selection‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Area1b‬ﺛﻢ أﺿﻐﻂ ‪) OK‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 991(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 991‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺮى ﻧﻤﻮذج اﻟﺘﺜﻠﻴﺚ اﻟﺬي ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﻣﺸﺎآﻞ دون إﺿﺎﻓﺔ أي آﺎﺋﻦ إﻟﻰ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻣﺸﺎهﺪة ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ ‪.Quick View‬‬ ‫3- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Surface Display‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪.Quick View‬‬ ‫- 801 -‬
  • 107. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ رﺳﻢ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ اﻟﻤﺜﻠﺜﺎت ﺑﺨﻄﻮط ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺔ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ.‬ ‫ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ اﻟﻤﺤﺎﻃﺔ ﺑﺪاﺋﺮة ﻣﻦ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 002( )ﻻﺣﻆ أن هﺬا اﻟﺠﺰء ﻣﻦ اﻟﺴﻄﺢ ﺗﻢ ﺑﻨﺎؤﻩ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻄﻮط آﻨﺘﻮر( ﺳﺘﺠﺪ أن ﺧﻄﻮط‬ ‫ﺷﺒﻜﺔ اﻟﻤﺜﻠﺜﺎت ﺗﻤﺘﺪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻄﻲ آﻨﺘﻮر ﻣﺘﺴﺎوﻳﺎن ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﻨﺴﻮب و ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ هﺬا ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺔ، ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ اﻟﺤﺎﻻت ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻋﺪد اﻷﺳﻄﺢ‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺔ و ﻟﻜﻦ أﺣﻴﺎﻧﺎ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺘﺎج إﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻳﺪوي ﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻣﺜﻞ هﺬﻩ اﻟﻤﺸﺎآﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺪوﺛﻬﺎ، أﻳﻀﺎ ﻳﺼﺎﺣﺐ ذﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎت ﻇﻬﻮر اﻟﻤﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ اﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ اﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻳﻜﻮن ﻣﺴﺘﻮي أو ﻣﺴﻄﺢ ﺛﻢ ﻳﻨﺤﺪر ﺑﺸﺪة و هﺬا ﻻ ﻳﻌﻜﺲ ﺷﻜﻞ اﻟﻤﻴﻞ اﻟﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ.‬ ‫4- ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﺮ اﻷواﻣﺮ أدﺧﻞ ‪ Redraw‬ﻟﺘﻤﺴﺢ ﺧﻄﻮط اﻟﺘﺜﻠﻴﺚ اﻟﻤﺆﻗﺘﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 002‬ ‫إﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻧﻘﺎط ﻟﻠﺴﻄﺢ ‪Adding Points to the Surface‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ إﺿﺎﻓﺔ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط إﻟﻰ اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﻨﺎء اﻟﺴﻄﺢ و ﻳﻤﻜﻦ إﻋﺎدة ﺑﻨﺎء اﻟﺴﻄﺢ ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى ﻓﻲ أي وﻗﺖ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت، ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ إﻋﺎدة ﺑﻨﺎء اﻟﺴﻄﺢ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ إﺿﺎﻓﺔ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط إﻟﻰ اﻟﺴﻄﺢ ذاﺗﻪ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮة.‬ ‫أوﻻ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻴﺮاد أﺿﻼع اﻟﺘﺜﻠﻴﺚ آﺨﻄﻮط ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ اﻷﺑﻌﺎد ‪.3D Lines‬‬ ‫1- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Edit Surface‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪.Import 3D Lines‬‬ ‫2- أﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﻘﺒﻞ اﻟﺨﻴﺎر اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ و هﻮ ‪ Yes‬ﻟﺘﻤﺴﺢ أﺿﻼع ﺷﺒﻜﺔ اﻟﻤﺜﻠﺜﺎت اﻟﻘﺪﻳﻤﺔ.‬ ‫ﺣﻴﺚ أن ﺧﻄﻮط اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ اﻟﻤﺤﺪدة ذات ﻣﻨﺴﻮب ﻣﺘﺴﺎوي و هﻮ 221 ﻣﺘﺮ، أﺿﻒ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﻄﺢ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ اﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺧﻄﻲ اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر )ﻣﺮآﺰ اﻟﺪاﺋﺮة رﻗﻢ 1( و ﻟﻴﻜﻦ ﻣﻨﺴﻮﺑﻬﺎ 5.121 ﻣﺘﺮ.‬ ‫3- ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬أﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Edit Surface‬ﺛﻢ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Add Point‬‬ ‫4- ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ‪ Center Osnap‬اﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺮآﺰ اﻟﺪاﺋﺮة اﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮة رﻗﻢ 1، و ادﺧﻞ 5.121 ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺴﻮب ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Enter‬‬ ‫ﺗﻢ إﺿﺎﻓﺔ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﻄﺢ و أﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﺘﺜﻠﻴﺚ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ و ﻟﻜﻦ ﺑﻌﺾ اﻟﻤﺜﻠﺜﺎت اﻟﻤﺴﻄﺤﺔ ﻣﺎزاﻟﺖ ﺑﺎﻗﻴﺔ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 102(.‬ ‫- 901 -‬
  • 108. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 102‬ ‫إﺿﺎﻓﺔ أو ﺣﺬف ﺧﻄﻮط ﻣﻦ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ اﻟﻤﺜﻠﺜﺎت ‪Adding and Deleting TIN Lines‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻀﻴﻒ ﺧﻄﻴﻦ ﻟﺘﺼﺤﺢ اﻟﺘﺜﻠﻴﺚ اﻟﻤﺴﻄﺢ.‬ ‫1- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Edit Surface‬ﺛﻢ ‪.Add Line‬‬ ‫2- ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ‪ Endpoint Osnap‬اﺧﺘﺮ رؤوس أﺿﻼع اﻟﻤﺜﻠﺜﺎت داﺧﻞ اﻟﺪاﺋﺮة 1 آﻨﻘﻄﺔ اﻟﺒﺪاﻳﺔ ‪ From point‬ﺛﻢ رؤوس‬ ‫أﺿﻼع اﻟﻤﺜﻠﺜﺎت داﺧﻞ اﻟﺪاﺋﺮة رﻗﻢ 2 آﻨﻘﻄﺔ اﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ‪ To point‬ﺛﻢ أﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Enter‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ إﺿﺎﻓﺔ اﻟﺨﻂ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ 1 و 2 و ﺧﻄﻮط اﻟﺘﺜﻠﻴﺚ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻣﻊ هﺬا اﻟﺨﻂ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 202(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 202‬ ‫ﺧﻄﻮط ﺷﺒﻜﺔ اﻟﻤﺜﻠﺜﺎت اﻟﻐﺮﻳﺒﺔ أو اﻟﺪﺧﻴﻠﺔ، أﺣﻴﺎﻧﺎ ﺗﻜﻮن اﻟﺨﻄﻮط اﻟﻔﻀﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻓﺔ اﻟﺴﻄﺢ اﻟﺨﺎرﺟﻴﺔ و ﻳﺠﺐ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ.‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﺬف اﻟﺨﻄﻮط اﻟﻔﻀﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻊ إﻟﻲ اﻟﻴﺴﺎر ﻣﻦ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ 2.‬ ‫3- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ View‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Named Views‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ View‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ 2B‬ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺖ ‪ Named‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Set Current‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫- 011 -‬
  • 109. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫4- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Edit Surface‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪.Delete Line‬‬ ‫5- اﺧﺘﺮ ﺧﻄﻮط اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ اﻟﻔﻀﻴﺔ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) Enter‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 302(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 302‬ ‫ﻗﻠﺐ أوﺟﻪ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ اﻟﻤﺜﻠﺜﺎت ‪Flipping TIN Faces‬‬ ‫1- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ View‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Named Views‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ View‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ 3 ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺖ ‪ Named‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ Set Current‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫إن ﺧﻄﻮط اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮن اﻷزرق اﻟﻔﺎﺗﺢ ‪ Cyan‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﺤﺪة )ذات ﻧﺘﻮء ﺣﺎد( ﻣﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﻴﻦ 3 و 4، ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﻞ هﺬﻩ اﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺑﻘﻠﺐ أوﺟﻪ‬ ‫اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﻴﻦ 3 و 4.‬ ‫2- ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Edit Surface‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪.Flip Face‬‬ ‫3- أﺧﺘﺮ ﺧﻂ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ اﻟﺬي ﻳﻘﻊ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﻴﻦ 3 و 4 ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) Enter‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 402-ﻗﺒﻞ اﻟﻘﻠﺐ(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 402‬ ‫- 111 -‬
  • 110. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺎدة إﻧﺸﺎء ﺧﻄﻮط اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر ﻟﺘﺮى اﻟﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺘﺜﻠﻴﺚ.‬ ‫4- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Create Contours‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Create Contours‬‬ ‫5- أﻗﺒﻞ اﻟﻘﻴﻢ اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺼﻨﺪوق ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) OK‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 502(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 502‬ ‫6- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﻘﺒﻞ ‪ Yes‬آﺨﻴﺎر اﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ﻟﺤﺬف ﺧﻄﻮط اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر اﻟﻘﺪﻳﻤﺔ ‪.erase old contours‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ إﻧﺸﺎء ﺧﻄﻮط اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى ﺑﻨﺎءا ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ اﻟﺬي ﺗﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ اﻟﻤﺜﻠﺜﺎت و ﺳﺘﺮى أن ﺧﻄﻮط اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ اﻧﺴﻴﺎﺑﻲ و‬ ‫ﻟﻴﺲ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺣﺎد )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 602(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 602‬ ‫- 211 -‬
  • 111. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺳﺠﻞ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ اﻟﺴﻄﺢ ‪Applying Surface Edit History‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ أن ﺗﻢ ﺑﻨﺎء اﻟﺴﻄﺢ و ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻪ، ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺘﺎج أﺣﻴﺎﻧﺎ إﻟﻰ إﺿﺎﻓﺔ اﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻄﻮط اﻻﻧﻜﺴﺎر، و ﻋﻨﺪ إﺿﺎﻓﺔ أي ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﺟﺪﻳﺪة ﻣﺜﻞ ﺧﻄﻮط‬ ‫اﻻﻧﻜﺴﺎر ﻓﻴﺠﺐ إﻋﺎدة ﺑﻨﺎء اﻟﺴﻄﺢ ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى، و ﻳﺠﺐ هﺬا أﻳﻀﺎ ﻃﺎﻟﻤﺎ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ إﺿﺎﻓﺔ أو ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ اﻟﺴﻄﺢ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ أواﻣﺮ اﻟـ ‪Surface‬‬ ‫‪.Editing‬‬ ‫ﺳﺠﻞ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ اﻟﺴﻄﺢ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ و إﺿﺎﻓﺘﻪ إﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺛﻢ إﻋﺎدة ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺴﻄﺢ ﻋﻨﺪ إﻋﺎدة ﺑﻨﺎؤﻩ.‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ إﻋﺎدة ﺑﻨﺎء اﻟﺴﻄﺢ، ﻟﻮ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر ‪ Apply Edit History‬ﻓﺈن ذﻟﻚ ﺳﻴﺒﻨﻲ ﺳﻄﺤﺎ ﺟﺪﻳﺪا و ﻣﻄﺒﻘﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺳﺠﻞ اﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ أﻣﺎ ﻟﻮ ﻗﻤﺖ‬ ‫ﺑﺒﻨﺎء اﻟﺴﻄﺢ دون اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ‪ Apply Edit History‬ﻓﺈن ذﻟﻚ ﺳﻴﻌﻴﺪ اﻟﺴﻄﺢ إﻟﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻪ اﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ اﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ.‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬أﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Terrain Model Explorer‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Terrain Model Explorer‬‬ ‫1-‬ ‫أﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Area1b‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر اﻟﻔﺄرة اﻷﻳﻤﻦ و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Build‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪Surface‬‬ ‫2-‬ ‫‪.Modified‬‬ ‫أﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Yes‬ﻟﺘﻌﻠﻢ أن اﻟﺴﻄﺢ ﻗﺪ ﻋﺪل و ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Build Area1b‬‬ ‫3-‬ ‫أدﺧﻞ ‪ Area1b‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻒ، ﺛﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Surface Data Options‬ﺗﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر آﻼ ﻣﻦ ‪ Surface Data Options‬و‬ ‫4-‬ ‫‪ Use breakline data‬و ‪) Use contour data‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 702(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 702‬ ‫5- اﺧﺘﺮ آﻼ ﻣﻦ ‪ Minimize flat triangles resulting from contour data‬و ‪) Apply Edit History‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬ ‫702( ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﺴﻄﺢ و إﻋﺎدة ﺑﻨﺎؤﻩ.‬ ‫6- ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ رﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻔﻴﺪ اﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﺑﻨﺎء اﻟﺴﻄﺢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﺛﻢ أﻏﻠﻖ ﻧﺎﻓﺬة ‪.Terrain Model Explorer‬‬ ‫7- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Surface Edit‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ ،Import 3D Lines‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﻘﺒﻞ‬ ‫‪ Yes‬آﺨﻴﺎر اﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ﻟﺤﺬف ﺧﻄﻮط اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ اﻟﻘﺪﻳﻤﺔ ‪.Erase old surface view‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﺠﺪ أن اﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻼت اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ إﻋﺎدة ﺑﻨﺎء اﻟﺴﻄﺢ.‬ ‫- 311 -‬
  • 112. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫اﻟﺪرس اﻟﺮاﺑﻊ ﻋﺸﺮ: إﻧﺸﺎء اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر ‪Lesson 14: Creating Contours‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ إﻧﺸﺎء ﺧﻄﻮط اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر آﻤﺘﻌﺪد ﺧﻄﻮط ‪ Polyline‬أو آﻜﺎﺋﻦ آﻨﺘﻮر ‪ ،Contour Object‬إن اﺳﺘﺨﺪام آﺎﺋﻨﺎت اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ أﺻﻐﺮ ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻒ و ﺗﻌﻄﻲ ﻣﺮوﻧﺔ أآﺒﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر )إﺿﺎﻓﺔ اﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﻴﺐ آﺘﺎﺑﺔ إﻟﻰ ﺧﻄﻮط اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر(.‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ هﺬا اﻟﺪرس:‬ ‫1- ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Land Desktop‬‬ ‫2- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ File‬أﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Open‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Open Drawing: Project Based‬‬ ‫إن اﻟﻤﺴﺎر اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻤﺸﺮوع ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﺴﺎر 6002 ‪ C:Land Projects‬ﻓﺈن آﻨﺖ ﻗﺪ ﻏﻴﺮت هﺬا اﻟﻤﺴﺎر أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺼﻴﺐ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻓﻴﺠﺐ أن ﺗﻀﻊ ذﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ اﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎر.‬ ‫3- ﻣـﻦ ﻗﺎﺋــﻤـــﺔ ‪ Project Name‬اﺧــﺘﺮ 1‪ TUTORIAL‬و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋــﻤـــﺔ ‪ Select Project Drawing‬اﺧـــﺘـﺮ‬ ‫‪ Lesson-14.dwg‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫4- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Projects‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Workspaces‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Land Desktop‬ﻟﺘﻌﺮض ﻗﻮاﺋﻢ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Land Desktop‬‬ ‫إﻧﺸﺎء اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر ‪Creating Contours‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء آﻨﺘﻮر ﻣﻦ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻮﺟﻮد ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﻋﺪة ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﻤﺸﺮوع و ﺑﻨﺎءا ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺴﻖ اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ و هﻮ اﻟﻨﺴﻖ اﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫‪ Standard Style‬اﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮد ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ Contour Style Manager‬آﺨﻴﺎر اﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ، ﺳﺘﻨﺸﺊ ﺧﻄﻮط اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر اﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ رأﺳﻲ 5 ﻣﺘﺮ و ﺧﻄﻮط اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻮﻳﺔ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ رأﺳﻲ 1 ﻣﺘﺮ.‬ ‫1- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Set Current Surface‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ Select Surface‬و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪ Selection‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪) AREA1C‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 802( ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 802‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Create Contours‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪) Create Contours‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 902(.‬ ‫2-‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Intervals‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪) Both Minor and Major‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 902(.‬ ‫3-‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Minor Interval‬اﺧﺘﺮ 1 ﻣﺘﺮ ﺛﻢ ﺗﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ أن اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ هﻲ ‪ CONT-MNR‬أﻣﺎم ‪) Layer‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 902(.‬ ‫4-‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Major Interval‬اﺧﺘﺮ 5 ﻣﺘﺮ ﺛﻢ ﺗﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ أن اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ هﻲ ‪ CONT-MJR‬أﻣﺎم ‪) Layer‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 902(.‬ ‫5-‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Properties‬ﺗﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ‪ ) Contour Objects‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 902( ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﺘﻨﺸﺊ اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر.‬ ‫6-‬ ‫- 411 -‬
  • 113. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 902‬ ‫7- ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﻘﺒﻞ اﻟﺨﻴﺎر اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ‪ Yes‬ﻟﺤﺬف اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر اﻟﻘﺪﻳﻢ ‪.erase old contours‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ إﻧﺸﺎء ﺧﻄﻮط اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ رأﺳﻲ أﺳﺎﺳﻲ 5 ﻣﺘﺮ و ﻓﺎﺻﻞ رأﺳﻲ ﺛﺎﻧﻮي 1 ﻣﺘﺮ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 012(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 012‬ ‫إﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﺴﻖ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻠﻜﻨﺘﻮر ‪Creating a New Contour Style‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﻧﺴﻖ اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر ﻣﻦ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ ،Contour Style Manager‬ﺳﺘﻌﺪل ﻣﻈﻬﺮ اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر و‬ ‫آﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻇﻬﻮر اﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﻴﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر و ﺗﻌﻴﻦ ﻧﺴﻖ اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر اﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺨﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﻟﺨﻄﻮط آﻨﺘﻮر ﻓﺮدﻳﺔ أو ﻟﻜﻞ اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر ﻓﻲ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ.‬ ‫- 511 -‬
  • 114. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫1- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Contour Style Manager‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪Contour Style‬‬ ‫‪) Manager‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 112(.‬ ‫2- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ Manage Styles‬و ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Contour Styles in Drawing‬أدﺧﻞ ‪ SMOOTH‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) Add‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 112(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 112‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻰ هﺬﻩ اﻟﺨﻄﻮة، ﻧﺴﻖ اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر اﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﻔﻈﻪ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪاﻣﻪ ﻓﻲ أي ﻣﺸﺮوع ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Save‬أو ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮار ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪاﻣﻪ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫اﻟﺮﺳﻢ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ.‬ ‫3- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ Contour Appearance‬ﻟﻠﺘﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ أن ‪ Current Style‬هﻮ ‪) SMOOTH‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 212(.‬ ‫4- ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Contour Display‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Contours and Grips‬ﺛﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Smoothing Options‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪Add‬‬ ‫‪ Vertices‬و اﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ اﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻖ إﻟﻰ 8 )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 212(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 212‬ ‫- 611 -‬
  • 115. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫5- ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ Text Style‬و ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Text Properties‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Style‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ 2MM‬و اﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﺪﻗﺔ إﻟﻰ 0 )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬ ‫312(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 312‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﻠﻮن ﻣﻦ أﻣﺎم ‪ Color‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ Select Color‬و ﻣﻨﻪ اﺧﺘﺮ اﻟﻠﻮن اﻷزرق اﻟﻔﺎﺗﺢ‬ ‫6-‬ ‫‪ Cyan‬ﺛﻢ أﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮع إﻟﻰ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪) Style Manager‬أو أدﺧﻞ اﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ 4 ﻓﻲ اﻟﺨﺎﻧﺔ اﻟﻤﺠﺎورة‬ ‫ﻟﺼﻨﺪوق اﻟﻠﻮن( )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 312(.‬ ‫ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ أﻣﺎم ‪ Suffix‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪) m‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 312(.‬ ‫7-‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ Label Position‬و ﻓﻲ اﻟﻘﺴﻢ ‪ Orientation‬ﺗﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ‪ On Contour‬و أﻳﻀﺎ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر‬ ‫8-‬ ‫‪) Break Contour For Label‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 412(.‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Readability‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Label Positive Slope‬و ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Border Around Label‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪Rectangular‬‬ ‫9-‬ ‫)اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 412( ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 412‬ ‫اﻵن ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻧﺴﻖ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﺨﻄﻮط اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر ﻓﻲ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ.‬ ‫- 711 -‬
  • 116. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻧﺴﻖ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻠﻜﻨﺘﻮر ‪Applying a New Contour Style‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ اﻟﻨﺴﻖ اﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ ‪ SMOOTH‬ﻋﻠﻰ آﻞ ﺧﻄﻮط اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر ﻓﻲ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ.‬ ‫1- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ أﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺎت ‪ Layer Icon‬و ﻗﻢ ﺑﺠﻌﻞ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ‪ CONT-MJR‬هﻲ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪ Current Layer‬و ﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺘﺠﻤﻴﺪ ‪ Freeze‬اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ 0.‬ ‫2- ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر آﻞ ﺧﻄﻮط اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر ﻣﻦ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ.‬ ‫3- ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر اﻟﻔﺄرة اﻷﻳﻤﻦ و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Contour Properties‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪Contour‬‬ ‫‪) Style Manager‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 512(.‬ ‫4- أﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ Manage Styles‬و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Contour Styles in Drawing‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪) SMOOTH‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬ ‫512( ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 512‬ ‫اﻵن ﺧﻄﻮط اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر ﻓﻲ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﻖ اﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ ‪) SMOOTH‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 612(.‬ ‫- 811 -‬
  • 117. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 612‬ ‫ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر )إدراج اﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﻴﺐ( ‪Labeling Contours‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ اﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﻴﺐ )آﻌﻨﻮﻧﺔ( ﻟﻠﻜﻨﺘﻮر ﺑﻨﺎءا ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺴﻖ اﻟﻌﻨﻮﻧﺔ اﻟﺬي ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪Contour Style‬‬ ‫‪.Manager‬‬ ‫1- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ View‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Named Views‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ View‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ 1 ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺖ ‪ Named‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ Set Current‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫2- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Contour Labels‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ أﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Group Interior‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار‬ ‫‪) Contour Labels – Increment‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 712(.‬ ‫3- أدﺧﻞ 2 أﻣﺎم ‪ Elevation Increment‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈزاﻟﺔ اﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﻣﻦ أﻣﺎم ‪Add multiple interior labels along each‬‬ ‫‪) contour‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 712( ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 712‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺴﺤﺐ ﺧﻂ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺧﻄﻮط اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر ﻟﻌﻨﻮﻧﺘﻬﺎ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 812(.‬ ‫- 911 -‬
  • 118. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 812‬ ‫4- ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻗﺮب اﻟﺮآﻦ اﻷﻳﺴﺮ اﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ اﻟﺒﺪاﻳﺔ ‪ ،Start Point‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ أﺧﺮى ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﺮآﻦ‬ ‫اﻷﻳﻤﻦ اﻟﻌﻠﻮي ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ اﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ‪ End Point‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻹﻧﻬﺎء اﻷﻣﺮ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 812(.‬ ‫ﺳﺘﺠﺪ أن ﺧﻄﻮط اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺘﻬﺎ آﻞ 2 ﻣﺘﺮ و ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﻳﺤﻴﻂ ﺑﻜﻞ ﻧﺺ ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ و آﺬﻟﻚ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ اﻟﺤﺮف ‪ m‬ﺑﻌﺪ آﻞ ﻣﻨﺴﻮب آﻼﺣﻘﺔ‬ ‫و ﺧﻄﻮط اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر ﺗﻨﻘﻄﻊ ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﻌﻨﻮﻧﺔ و ﻟﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻮاﻗﻊ ﻣﺎزاﻟﺖ ﺧﻂ واﺣﺪ ﻣﻜﺘﻤﻞ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 912(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 912‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ وﺿﻊ )ﻣﻜﺎن( اﻟﻌﻨﻮﻧﺔ.‬ ‫5- اﺧﺘﺮ ﺧﻂ آﻨﺘﻮر ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻀﻪ ‪ Grips‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ اﻟﻤﻘﺒﺾ اﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮد ﻓﻲ وﺳﻂ اﻟﻌﻨﻮﻧﺔ ﺛﻢ اﺳﺤﺐ اﻟﻌﻨﻮﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﻮل ﺧﻂ‬ ‫اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 022(.‬ ‫- 021 -‬
  • 119. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 022‬ ‫6- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﻜﺎن اﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﻤﺮاد وﺿﻊ اﻟﻌﻨﻮﻧﺔ ﻓﻴﻪ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 022(.‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻈﻞ اﻟﻨﺺ )اﻟﻌﻨﻮﻧﺔ( ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻼﻗﺘﻪ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺧﻂ اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر.‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺤﺬف ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ آﻨﺘﻮر.‬ ‫7- ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Contour Labels‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪.Delete Labels‬‬ ‫8- ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﺧﻂ اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر اﻟﺬي ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﺬف اﻟﻌﻨﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻨﻪ، ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر أي ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮب ﻣﻦ اﻟﻌﻨﻮﻧﺔ اﻟﻤﺮاد ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ هﺬا اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر ﺛﻢ‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﻹﻧﻬﺎء اﻷﻣﺮ.‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﺬف ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر اﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎر.‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ آﺎﺋﻦ اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر ‪Converting Contour Objects‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ اﻷﺣﻴﺎن ﻣﻦ اﻟﻀﺮوري ﺗﺰوﻳﺪ اﻵﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺑﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر و اﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻠﻜﻮن ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ ،Land Desktop‬و ﻓﻲ هﺬﻩ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ آﺎﺋﻦ‬ ‫اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر ‪ Contour Object‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺘﺎج ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ إﻟﻰ ﻣﺘﻌﺪد ﺧﻄﻮط ‪ ،Polyline‬اﺳﺘﺨﺪم اﻷﻣﺮ ‪ Explode‬ﻣﻦ أواﻣﺮ اﻟـ ‪AutoCAD‬‬ ‫ﻟﻔﻌﻞ ذﻟﻚ.‬ ‫و ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻜﺲ ﻓﺈن اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر اﻟﻤﻤﺜﻞ ﺑﻤﺘﻌﺪد ﺧﻄﻮط ‪ Polyline‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻠﻪ إﻟﻰ آﺎﺋﻦ آﻨﺘﻮر ‪.Contour Object‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ آﻨﺘﻮر ﻣﻦ آﺎﺋﻦ آﻨﺘﻮر إﻟﻰ ﻣﺘﻌﺪد ﺧﻄﻮط ﺛﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﺪﻩ ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى إﻟﻰ آﺎﺋﻦ آﻨﺘﻮر.‬ ‫1- ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﺮ اﻷواﻣﺮ أدﺧﻞ ‪ Explode‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ﺧﻂ آﻨﺘﻮر ﺛﻢ أﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Enter‬‬ ‫2- أدﺧﻞ ‪ List‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ذات ﺧﻂ اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر.‬ ‫ﺧﻂ اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر اﻵن أﺻﺒﺢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪد ﺧﻄﻮط ‪) lightweight polyline‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 122(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 122‬ ‫3- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Esc‬ﺛﻢ أﻏﻠﻖ اﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬة ‪.AutoCAD Text Window‬‬ ‫4- ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Contour Utilities‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ أﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Convert Polylines‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻔﺲ‬ ‫ﺧﻂ اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Enter‬‬ ‫5- أدﺧﻞ ‪ List‬ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﺮ اﻷواﻣﺮ و اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ﺧﻂ اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر اﻟﻤﺤﻮل.‬ ‫اﻟﺨﻂ اﻵن أﺻﺒﺢ ‪) AECC_CONTOUR‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 222(.‬ ‫- 121 -‬
  • 120. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 222‬ ‫6- أﻏﻠﻖ اﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬة ‪.AutoCAD Text Window‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ آﺎﺋﻦ اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر اﻟﻤﻌﻨﻮن إﻟﻰ ﻣﺘﻌﺪد ﺧﻄﻮط ﻓﺴﻴﺘﺤﻮل إﻟﻰ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻠﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﻀﻬﺎ و ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى‬ ‫إﻟﻰ آﺎﺋﻦ آﻨﺘﻮر واﺣﺪ، و ﻟﺤﻞ هﺬﻩ اﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺣﺬف اﻟﻌﻨﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ آﺎﺋﻦ اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻠﻬﻢ إﻟﻰ ﻣﺘﻌﺪد ﺧﻄﻮط.‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر ‪Editing Contours‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام أواﻣﺮ اﻟـ ‪ AutoCAD‬ﻓﻲ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺧﻄﻮط اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر ﻣﺜﻞ اﻷواﻣﺮ ‪ Trim‬و ‪ Extend‬و ‪ Break‬و ‪ Erase‬و إن آﺎن ﻧﺴﻖ‬ ‫اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر ‪ Contour Style‬ﺑﻪ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ اﻟﻤﻘﺎﺑﺾ ﻣﻤﻜﻨﺔ )ﻣﺨﻮﻟﺔ( ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﻤﻘﺎﺑﺾ.‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﻘﻄﻊ و ﻣﺪ ﺧﻄﻮط اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر ﻟﺘﺒﻘﻴﻬﺎ داﺧﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻣﺴﻮرة، اﺳﺘﺨﺪم ﻣﺘﻌﺪد اﻟﺨﻄﻮط ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ 0 آﺤﺪود ﻟﻸرض.‬ ‫1- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ أﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺎت و ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﻚ ﺗﺠﻤﻴﺪ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ 0.‬ ‫2- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ View‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Named Views‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ View‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ 2 ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺖ ‪ Named‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ Set Current‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫3- أدﺧﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﺮ اﻷواﻣﺮ ‪ Trim‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ﺧﻂ اﻟﺤﺪود )ﻣﺘﻌﺪد اﻟﺨﻄﻮط اﻷﺑﻴﺾ اﻟﻠﻮن( آﺤﺪ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﻊ ﺛﻢ‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Enter‬‬ ‫4- اﺧﺘﺮ ﺧﻄﻮط اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر اﻟﻤﻤﺘﺪة ﺧﺎرج اﻟﺤﺪود ﻟﻘﻄﻌﻬﺎ ﺛﻢ أﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) Enter‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 322(.‬ ‫5- أدﺧﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﺮ اﻷواﻣﺮ ‪ Extend‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ﺧﻂ اﻟﺤﺪود )ﻣﺘﻌﺪد اﻟﺨﻄﻮط اﻷﺑﻴﺾ اﻟﻠﻮن( آﺤﺪ ﻟﻠﻤﺪ ﺛﻢ‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Enter‬‬ ‫6- اﺧﺘﺮ ﺧﻄﻮط اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر اﻟﻮاﻗﻌﺔ داﺧﻞ اﻟﺤﺪود ﻟﻤﺪهﺎ ﺛﻢ أﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) Enter‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 322(.‬ ‫- 221 -‬
  • 121. By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials 223 ‫ﺷﻜﻞ‬ - 123 -
  • 122. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫اﻟﺪرس اﻟﺨﺎﻣﺲ ﻋﺸﺮ: ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ اﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎت ‪Lesson 15: Generating Sections‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺪرس ﺳﺘﺘﻌﻠﻢ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ اﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎت اﻟﻌﺮﺿﻴﺔ ‪ Cross Sections‬ﻹﻇﻬﺎر ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺳﻄﺢ اﻷرض ﺳﻮاء ﻟﺴﻄﺢ واﺣﺪ أو ﻋﺪة‬ ‫أﺳﻄﺢ.‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ هﺬا اﻟﺪرس:‬ ‫1- ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Land Desktop‬‬ ‫2- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ File‬أﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Open‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Open Drawing: Project Based‬‬ ‫إن اﻟﻤﺴﺎر اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻤﺸﺮوع ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﺴﺎر 6002 ‪ C:Land Projects‬ﻓﺈن آﻨﺖ ﻗﺪ ﻏﻴﺮت هﺬا اﻟﻤﺴﺎر أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺼﻴﺐ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻓﻴﺠﺐ أن ﺗﻀﻊ ذﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ اﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎر.‬ ‫3- ﻣــﻦ ﻗــﺎﺋـﻤﺔ ‪ Project Name‬اﺧــــﺘــﺮ 1‪ TUTORIAL‬و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Select Project Drawing‬اﺧــــﺘـــﺮ‬ ‫‪ Lesson-15.dwg‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫4- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Projects‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Workspaces‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Land Desktop‬ﻟﺘﻌﺮض ﻗﻮاﺋﻢ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Land Desktop‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ و ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ اﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎت ﻣﻦ ﺳﻄﺢ واﺣﺪ ‪Defining and Processing Sections From Single Surface‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻗﻄﺎﻋﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻮﺟﻮد ﺑﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﺧﻄﻮط ﻣﻮﺟﻮدة ﻓﻲ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻔﻬﺎ آﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎت، أوﻻ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﺴﻄﺢ‬ ‫‪ EG‬آﺎﻟﺴﻄﺢ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ.‬ ‫1- ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Set Current Surface‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪) Select Surface‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 422(.‬ ‫2- ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Selection‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ EG‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) OK‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 422(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 422‬ ‫3- ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Sections‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪.Define Sections‬‬ ‫4- أدﺧﻞ ‪ W-E‬ﻟـ ‪ Group Label‬و أدﺧﻞ ‪ AA‬ﻟـ ‪.Section Label‬‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪد اﻟﺨﻂ ‪ AA‬آﺄول ﺧﻂ ﻗﻄﺎع.‬ ‫5- ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ‪ Endpoint Osnap‬اﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ اﻟﺨﻂ ‪ AA‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ اﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺛﻢ و ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ‪ Endpoint Osnap‬أﻳﻀﺎ اﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫اﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ اﻷﺧﺮى ﻣﻦ اﻟﺨﻂ ‪) AA‬اﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ اﻷﻳﻤﻦ(.‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪد اﻟﺨﻂ ‪ BB‬آﺜﺎﻧﻲ ﺧﻂ ﻗﻄﺎع.‬ ‫6- أدﺧﻞ ‪ BB‬ﻟـ ‪ Section Label‬و ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ‪ Endpoint Osnap‬اﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ اﻟﺨﻂ ‪ BB‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ اﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺛﻢ و ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام‬ ‫‪ Endpoint Osnap‬أﻳﻀﺎ اﺧﺘﺮ اﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ اﻷﺧﺮى ﻣﻦ اﻟﺨﻂ ‪) BB‬اﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ اﻷﻳﻤﻦ(.‬ ‫7- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ.‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ هﺎﻣﺔ: ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺤﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻳﻤﺜﻞ ﺷﻜﻞ اﻷرض ﻓﻴﺠﺐ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﺧﻂ اﻟﻘﻄﺎع ﻣﻦ اﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ اﻷﻳﺴﺮ أوﻻ ﺛﻢ اﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ اﻷﻳﻤﻦ.‬ ‫اﻟﺨﻄﻮة اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ هﻲ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ اﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎت.‬ ‫8- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Sections‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪.Process Sections‬‬ ‫- 421 -‬
  • 123. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫اﻵن ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻗﻄﺎﻋﺎن ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺎن ﻣﻦ ﺳﻄﺢ واﺣﺪ.‬ ‫اﺳﺘﻴﺮاد اﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎت ﻣﻦ ﺳﻄﺢ واﺣﺪ ‪Importing Sections From Single Surface‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻴﺮاد اﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎت إﻟﻰ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ.‬ ‫1- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Sections‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪.Import Sections‬‬ ‫2- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﺘﻘﺒﻞ اﻟﺨﻴﺎر اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ‪ Datum‬و هﻮ اﺳﻢ ﻃﺒﻘﺔ ﺧﻂ اﻟﻤﻘﺎرﻧﺔ.‬ ‫3- أدﺧﻞ 2 ﻟﻤﻌﺎﻣﻞ اﻟﻤﻘﻴﺎس اﻟﺮأﺳﻲ.‬ ‫4- أﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ اﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺨﻂ ‪ AA‬ﻹدراج اﻟﻘﻄﺎع ‪ AA‬ﻋﻨﺪهﺎ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﻘﺒﻞ اﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﻨﺴﻮب ﺧﻂ اﻟﻤﻘﺎرﻧﺔ.‬ ‫5- أﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ اﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺨﻂ ‪ BB‬ﻹدراج اﻟﻘﻄﺎع ‪ BB‬ﻋﻨﺪهﺎ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﻘﺒﻞ اﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﻨﺴﻮب ﺧﻂ اﻟﻤﻘﺎرﻧﺔ.‬ ‫6- آﺒﺮ اﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ‪ Zoom in‬ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎت اﻟﻤﻨﺸﺄة ﻣﻦ ﺳﻄﺢ واﺣﺪ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 522(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 522‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ هﺎﻣﺔ: اﻟﻨﺺ اﻟﻤﺠﺎور ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎع ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﻤﻘﻴﺎس ﺻﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ اﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﻄﺎع و ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮﻩ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻷﻣﺮ ‪Scale‬‬ ‫و ﻓﻲ اﻟﺸﻜﻞ 522 اﻟﻘﻄﺎع ‪ AA‬ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ اﻟﻨﺺ اﻟﺨﺎص ﺑﻪ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ اﻟﻘﻄﺎع ‪ BB‬ﺗﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻧﺼﻪ ﺑﻤﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ 05.‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻀﻴﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎت.‬ ‫7- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Sections‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ‪.Grid for Sections‬‬ ‫8- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﻘﺒﻞ اﻟﺨﻴﺎر اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ‪ Grid‬آﺎﺳﻢ ﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ اﻟﻘﻄﺎع.‬ ‫9- اﺧﺘﺮ آﺘﻠﺔ اﻟﻨﺺ اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺴﻄﺢ اﻟﻤﻘﺎرﻧﺔ ‪ Section datum block text‬ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎع ‪) AA‬ﺗﻮﺟﺪ اﻟﻜﺘﻠﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﺮآﻦ اﻷﻳﺴﺮ‬ ‫اﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ و ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺮاهﺎ ﻟﺼﻐﺮهﺎ اﻟﻤﺘﻨﺎهﻲ(، ﺛﻢ ادﺧﻞ 2 ﻟـ ‪ Elevation increment‬و أدﺧﻞ 5 ﻟـ ‪.Offset increment‬‬ ‫01- اﺧﺘﺮ آﺘﻠﺔ اﻟﻨﺺ اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺴﻄﺢ اﻟﻤﻘﺎرﻧﺔ ‪ Section datum block text‬ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎع ‪ BB‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﻘﺒﻞ اﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‬ ‫اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻴﺔ 2 ﻟـ ‪ Elevation increment‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﻘﺒﻞ اﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻴﺔ 5 ﻟـ ‪ Offset increment‬ﺛﻢ‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﻨﻬﻲ اﻷﻣﺮ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 622(.‬ ‫- 521 -‬
  • 124. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 622‬ ‫إﻧﺸﺎء و ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ اﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎت ﻣﻦ أﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة ‪Creating and Processing Sections from Multiple Surfaces‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﻗﻄﺎع ﺛﺎﻟﺚ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺴﻄﺢ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ )‪ Existing Ground (EG‬و ﻣﻦ ﺳﻄﺢ اﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ‪Finishing Ground‬‬ ‫)‪.(FG‬‬ ‫1- ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ اﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﻟﺮؤﻳﺔ ﺧﻄﻮط اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر أو ادﺧﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﺮ اﻷواﻣﺮ ‪ ZE‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Enter‬‬ ‫2- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Sections‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Multiple Surfaces On/Off‬و ﺗﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮض‬ ‫اﻟﺠﻤﻠﺔ اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﺮ اﻷواﻣﺮ "‪) "Multiple surfaces are on‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 722(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 722‬ ‫3- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Sections‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Define Multiple Surfaces‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق‬ ‫اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Multiple Surface Selection‬‬ ‫4- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Select from‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح ‪ Ctrl‬ﻣﻊ اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮار ﻓﻲ اﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ EG‬و ‪) FG‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 822(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 822‬ ‫- 621 -‬
  • 125. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫5- ﺗﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮض ‪ EG‬و ‪ FG‬ﻓﻲ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪) Current‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 822(. ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪد اﻟﺨﻂ ‪ CC‬آﺨﻂ ﻗﻄﺎع ﺛﺎﻟﺚ.‬ ‫6- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Sections‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪.Define Sections‬‬ ‫7- أدﺧﻞ ‪ SE-NW‬ﻟـ ‪ Group Label‬و ادﺧﻞ ‪ CC‬ﻟـ ‪.Section Label‬‬ ‫8- ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ‪ Endpoint Osnap‬اﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ اﻟﺨﻂ ‪ CC‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ اﻟﻌﻠﻮي ﺛﻢ و ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ‪ Endpoint Osnap‬أﻳﻀﺎ اﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫اﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ اﻷﺧﺮى ﻣﻦ اﻟﺨﻂ ‪) CC‬اﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ اﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ(.‬ ‫9- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﻹﻧﻬﺎء اﻷﻣﺮ.‬ ‫اﻟﺨﻄﻮة اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ هﻲ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ اﻟﻘﻄﺎع.‬ ‫01- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Sections‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪.Process Sections‬‬ ‫11- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﻘﺒﻞ اﻟﺠﻮاب اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ‪ Yes‬ﻹﻟﺤﺎق اﻟﻘﻄﺎع ﺑﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎت اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ‪Append to the end‬‬ ‫‪.of the existing section file‬‬ ‫21- ادﺧﻞ ‪ SE-NW‬ﻻﺳﻢ اﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺠﺐ أن ﻳﺴﺘﺪﻋﻴﻬﺎ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Enter‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ هﺎﻣﺔ: ﻳﻘﻮم اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺑﻌﺮض أﺳﻤﺎء اﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎت اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻟﺪﻳﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﺮ اﻷواﻣﺮ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 922(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 922‬ ‫اﺳﺘﻴﺮاد اﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎت ﻣﻦ أﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة ‪Importing Sections From Multiple Surfaces‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Sections‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪.Import Sections‬‬ ‫1-‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﻘﺒﻞ ‪ Datum‬آﺎﺳﻢ ﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﺧﻂ اﻟﻤﻘﺎرﻧﺔ.‬ ‫2-‬ ‫أدﺧﻞ 2 ﻟﻤﻌﺎﻣﻞ اﻟﻤﻘﻴﺎس اﻟﺮأﺳﻲ.‬ ‫3-‬ ‫اﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮب ﻣﻦ ﻗﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ )اﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ اﻟﻌﻠﻮي ﻣﻦ ﺧﻂ اﻟﻘﻄﺎع ‪ (CC‬ﻹدراج اﻟﻘﻄﺎع ‪ CC‬إﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﻘﺒﻞ‬ ‫4-‬ ‫اﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﻨﺴﻮب ﺳﻄﺢ اﻟﻤﻘﺎرﻧﺔ ‪.Datum‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ اﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﻟﺘﺮى اﻟﻘﻄﺎع )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 032(.‬ ‫5-‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 032‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎهﺪة اﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎت اﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮآﺔ ‪Viewing Dynamic Sections‬‬ ‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪم اﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎت اﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮآﺔ اﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ آﺄداة ﻟﺘﺸﺎهﺪ ﻗﻄﺎﻋﺎت ﻣﻦ اﻟﺴﻄﺢ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺎت ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ، اﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎت اﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ ‪Dynamic‬‬ ‫‪ Sections‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ و ﻟﺼﻘﻬﺎ إﻟﻰ أي ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎت اﻟـ ®‪ Windows‬أو اﺳﺘﻴﺮادهﺎ إﻟﻰ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎ ﻣﻘﻴﺎس اﻟﺮﺳﻢ‬ ‫اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ.‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ إﻧﺸﺎء ﻗﻄﺎﻋﺎت ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻄﺢ واﺣﺪ أو ﻋﺪة أﺳﻄﺢ، إن ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ اﻷﺳﻄﺢ اﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪدة ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ اﻵن ﻓﻲ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻟﺬا ﻓﺈن اﻷﺳﻄﺢ اﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻜﻮن ﺑﻨﺎءا ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺴﻄﺤﻴﻦ ‪ EG‬و ‪)FG‬ﻟﻘﺪ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎرهﻤﺎ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ(.‬ ‫1- ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ اﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﻟﺘﺸﺎهﺪ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ آﺎﻣﻼ أو أدﺧﻞ ‪ ZE‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Enter‬‬ ‫2- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Sections‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪.View Quick Section‬‬ ‫3- اﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺧﻂ اﻟﻘﻄﺎع ‪ CC‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﻧﺎﻓﺬة اﻟﻘﻄﺎع.‬ ‫ﻧﺎﻓﺬة اﻟﻘﻄﺎع ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻜﻬﺎ و إﻋﺎدة ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻘﺎﺳﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ، و ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ أﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ اﻟﻘﻄﺎع ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Section‬ﻓﻲ‬ ‫اﻟﺮآﻦ اﻷﻳﺴﺮ اﻟﻌﻠﻮي ﻣﻦ ﻧﺎﻓﺬة اﻟﻘﻄﺎع.‬ ‫- 721 -‬
  • 126. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ اﻟﻤﻘﻴﺎس اﻟﺮأﺳﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎع.‬ ‫4- ﻣﻦ ﻧﺎﻓﺬة ‪ Section‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﺎﻓﺬة اﻟﻘﻄﺎع ‪ Section Window‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ View Properties‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪Quick‬‬ ‫‪) Section Properties‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 132(.‬ ‫5- ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ Grid Settings‬أدﺧﻞ 2 أﻣﺎم ‪ Vertical factor‬و أدﺧﻞ 01 أﻣﺎم ‪ Minimum Vertical Increment‬و‬ ‫أدﺧﻞ 05 أﻣﺎم ‪) Minimum Horizontal Increment‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 132(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 132‬ ‫6- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ ،Surface Color Settings‬و ﻻﺣﻆ أن اﻟﻠﻮن اﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎر ﻟﻠﺴﻄﺢ ‪ EG‬هﻮ اﻷﺧﻀﺮ و اﻟﺴﻄﺢ ‪ FG‬هﻮ‬ ‫اﻷزرق و ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ اﻷﻟﻮان ﺑﺤﺪ أﻗﺼﻰ ﻟـ 8 أﺳﻄﺢ ﻋﻨﺪ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ اﻷﺳﻄﺢ اﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪدة.‬ ‫7- أﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺧﻂ اﻟﻘﻄﺎع ‪ CC‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﻤﻘﺎﺑﺾ ‪ Grips‬و ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ اﻟﻘﻄﺎع ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ.‬ ‫8- اﺧﺘﺮ ﺧﻂ اﻟﻘﻄﺎع ‪ CC‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﻣﻘﺎﺑﺾ اﻟﺨﻂ ﺛﻢ اﻣﺴﻚ إﺣﺪى هﺬﻩ اﻟﻤﻘﺎﺑﺾ و ﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬ ‫232(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 232‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻆ أن ﻧﺎﻓﺬة اﻟﻘﻄﺎع ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺜﻬﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻟﺘﻌﻜﺲ اﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ اﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﺨﻂ اﻟﻘﻄﺎع اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 332(.‬ ‫- 821 -‬
  • 127. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 332‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺳﺘﻴﺮاد ﻗﻄﺎع ﺳﺮﻳﻊ إﻟﻰ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎ ﻣﻘﻴﺎس اﻟﺮﺳﻢ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ.‬ ‫9- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Utilities‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﺎﻓﺬة اﻟﻘﻄﺎع اﺧﺘﺮ ‪.Import Quick Section‬‬ ‫01- ادﺧﻞ 1‪ tutorial‬آﺒﺎدﺋﺔ ﻻﺳﻢ ﻃﺒﻘﺔ اﻷﺳﻄﺢ ‪.Layer name prefix for surfaces‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺴﺘﻮرد ﻗﻄﺎع ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﻓﻴﺘﻢ وﺿﻊ ﺧﻂ اﻟﻘﻄﺎع ﻟﻜﻞ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻦ اﻷﺳﻄﺢ ﻓﻲ ﻃﺒﻘﺔ ﻣﻔﺮدة، و ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﺒﺎدﺋﺔ 1‪ tutoral‬ﻓﺈن اﺳﻢ ﻃﺒﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺧﻂ اﻟﻘﻄﺎع ﻟﻠﺴﻄﺢ ‪ EG‬ﺳﻴﻜﻮن ‪) tutorial1-EG‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 432(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 432‬ ‫11- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﻘﺒﻞ اﻟﺨﻴﺎر اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ‪ Datum‬آﺎﺳﻢ ﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﺧﻂ اﻟﻤﻘﺎرﻧﺔ ‪.Datum‬‬ ‫21- أدﺧﻞ ‪ CC‬آﻮﺻﻒ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎع.‬ ‫31- أدﺧﻞ 2 آﻤﻌﺎﻣﻞ اﻟﻤﻘﻴﺎس اﻟﺮأﺳﻲ ‪.Vertical scale factor‬‬ ‫41- أﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻟﺘﺪرج ﻋﻨﺪهﺎ اﻟﻘﻄﺎع.‬ ‫51- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﻘﺒﻞ اﻟﻤﻨﺴﻮب اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ﻟﻤﻨﺴﻮب ﺳﻄﺢ اﻟﻤﻘﺎرﻧﺔ.‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ اﺳﺘﻴﺮاد اﻟﻘﻄﺎع اﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ إﻟﻰ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ.‬ ‫61- أﻏﻠﻖ ﻧﺎﻓﺬة اﻟﻘﻄﺎع اﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻟﺘﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ رؤﻳﺔ اﻟﻘﻄﺎع ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 532(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 532‬ ‫- 921 -‬
  • 128. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫اﻟﺪرس اﻟﺴﺎدس ﻋﺸﺮ: ﺗﺼﻮر اﻟﺴﻄﺢ ‪Lesson 16: Visualizing Surfaces‬‬ ‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪم ﻣﻴﺰات ﺗﺼﻮر اﻟﺴﻄﺢ ‪ Surface Visualization‬ﻟﺘﻈﻬﺮ اﻟﻘﻤﻢ اﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ‪ Elevation Banding‬و ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﻟﺨﻄﻮط ﺟﺮﻳﺎن‬ ‫اﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ ‪ ،Watershed‬و اﺳﺘﺨﺪم ﻣﺸﺎهﺪ اﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎت ‪ Object Viewer‬ﻟﺘﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻣﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻷﺳﻄﺢ.‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ هﺬا اﻟﺪرس:‬ ‫1- ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Land Desktop‬‬ ‫2- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ File‬أﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Open‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Open Drawing: Project Based‬‬ ‫إن اﻟﻤﺴﺎر اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻤﺸﺮوع ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﺴﺎر 6002 ‪ C:Land Projects‬ﻓﺈن آﻨﺖ ﻗﺪ ﻏﻴﺮت هﺬا اﻟﻤﺴﺎر أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺼﻴﺐ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻓﻴﺠﺐ أن ﺗﻀﻊ ذﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ اﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎر.‬ ‫3- ﻣــﻦ ﻗـﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Project Name‬اﺧــﺘـــﺮ 1‪ TUTORIAL‬و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Select Project Drawing‬اﺧـــــﺘـــﺮ‬ ‫‪ Lesson-16.dwg‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫4- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Projects‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Workspaces‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Land Desktop‬ﻟﺘﻌﺮض ﻗﻮاﺋﻢ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Land Desktop‬‬ ‫إﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎت اﻻرﺗﻔﺎع ‪Creating Elevation Banding‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎت ﻟﻼرﺗﻔﺎﻋﺎت ﺑﺄوﺟﻪ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ اﻷﺑﻌﺎد ‪.3D Faces‬‬ ‫1- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Set Current Surface‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Select Surface‬‬ ‫2- ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Select surface to Open‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Area1C‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) OK‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 632(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 632‬ ‫3- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Surface Display‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Banding - 3D Faces‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق‬ ‫اﻟﺤﻮار ‪) Surface Elevation Shading Settings‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 732(.‬ ‫4- ﺗﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ إزاﻟﺔ اﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﻣﻦ أﻣﺎم ‪ Create Skirts‬و أدﺧﻞ 2 أﻣﺎم ‪ Vertical factor‬و أدﺧﻞ 6 أﻣﺎم ‪Number of‬‬ ‫‪) ranges‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 732( ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Auto-Range‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Terrain Range Limits‬‬ ‫- 031 -‬
  • 129. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 732‬ ‫5- اﻗﺒﻞ اﻟﻘﻴﻢ اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) OK‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 832(. ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪Surface Range‬‬ ‫‪.Definitions‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 832‬ ‫6- أﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮع إﻟﻰ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ Surface Elevation Shading Settings‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻣﺮة‬ ‫أﺧﺮى.‬ ‫7- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﻘﺒﻞ اﻟﺨﻴﺎر اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ‪ Yes‬ﻟﺤﺬف اﻟﻤﺸﺎهﺪ اﻟﻘﺪﻳﻤﺔ ‪ Erase old range view‬ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض اﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬة‬ ‫‪.Range Statistics‬‬ ‫8- ﺑﻌﺪ اﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﻣﺸﺎهﺪة ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت إﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ اﻟﻨﻄﺎﻗﺎت )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 932( اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫- 131 -‬
  • 130. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 932‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ رﺳﻢ ﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎت اﻻرﺗﻔﺎﻋﺎت ﺑﺄوﺟﻪ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ اﻷﺑﻌﺎد ‪) 3D Faces‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 042(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 042‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎهﺪة اﻷﺳﻄﺢ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺸﺎهﺪ اﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎت ‪Viewing Surfaces in the Object Viewer‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﺮاض ﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎت اﻻرﺗﻔﺎﻋﺎت ﻓﻲ ﻣﺸﺎهﺪ اﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎت ‪.Object Viewer‬‬ ‫1- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Utilities‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪.Object Viewer‬‬ ‫2- ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻧﺎﻓﺬة اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ‪ Window Selection‬اﺧﺘﺮ آﻞ ﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎت اﻻرﺗﻔﺎع ﻣﻦ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Enter‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض ﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎت اﻻرﺗﻔﺎﻋﺎت ﻓﻲ ﻣﺸﺎهﺪ اﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎت )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 142(.‬ ‫- 231 -‬
  • 131. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫إن إﻃﺎر اﻷﺳﻼك ‪ Wire frame‬هﻮ ﻧﻈﺎم اﻟﻌﺮض اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ﻟﻤﺸﺎهﺪ اﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎت ‪ ،Object Viewer‬و ﻟﻤﺸﺎهﺪ اﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎت أﻳﻀﺎ ﺳﺖ ﻧﻈﻢ‬ ‫ﻋﺮض ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻣﺪة ‪ Orthogonal‬و أرﺑﻌﺔ أﺧﺮى ﻣﺘﺴﺎوﻳﺔ اﻟﻘﻴﺎس ‪ Isometric‬ﻟﺘﺨﺘﺎر ﺑﻴﻨﻬﻢ، اﻟﻨﻈﺎم اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﻨﺎﻓﺬة ‪AutoCAD Editor‬‬ ‫هﻮ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺸﺎهﺪ اﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎت ‪.Object Viewer‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 142‬ ‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪام أدوات اﻟﻤﻼﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺸﺎهﺪ اﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎت ‪Using Object Viewer Navigation Tools‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﺴﺘﺨﺪم أدوات اﻟﻤﻼﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺸﺎهﺪ اﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎت ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ و اﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ‪ Zoom in and out‬و اﻟﺘﺠﻮال ‪ Pan‬ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺎهﺪ‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺘﻮازﻳﺔ ‪ Parallel views‬و اﻟﻘﺮب و اﻟﺒﻌﺪ ‪ Move in and out‬ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺎهﺪ اﻟﻤﻨﻈﻮرة ‪ ،Perspective views‬اﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﺸﺎهﺪ اﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎت هﻮ اﻟﻤﺸﺎهﺪ اﻟﻤﺘﻮازﻳﺔ ‪.Parallel views‬‬ ‫1- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ أﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ‪) Zoom‬ﺛﺎﻟﺚ أﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ اﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺼﻒ اﻟﻌﻠﻮي( ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮك ﻣﺆﺷﺮ اﻟﻔﺄرة ﻣﻊ اﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺰر‬ ‫اﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ و اﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 242(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 242‬ ‫2- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ أﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ‪) Pan‬راﺑﻊ أﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ اﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺼﻒ اﻟﻌﻠﻮي( ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ اﻟﻔﺄرة ﻣﻊ اﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺰر‬ ‫اﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﺠﻮل ﻓﻲ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 342(.‬ ‫- 331 -‬
  • 132. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 342‬ ‫3- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ أﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ‪) Perspective‬ﺛﺎﻧﻲ أﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ اﻟﻴﺴﺎر ﻓﻲ اﻟﺼﻒ اﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ( ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ اﻟﻔﺄرة ﻣﻊ اﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺰر اﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻟﺘﺘﺤﺮك ﻗﺮﺑﺎ و ﺑﻌﺪا )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 442(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 442‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام أﻳﻘﻮﻧﺎت أﺧﺮى ﻣﻦ اﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬة ﻟﺘﺤﺪد ﻣﻘﺎﻳﻴﺲ اﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ اﻟﻤﺘﻮازي ‪.Parallel View‬‬ ‫4- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ أﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ‪) Orbit‬ﺛﺎﻧﻲ أﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ اﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺼﻒ اﻟﻌﻠﻮي( ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ اﻟﻔﺄرة ﻣﻊ اﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺰر‬ ‫اﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻟﺘﻠﻒ اﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺣﻮل اﻟﺜﻼث ﻣﺤﺎور ‪ X‬و ‪ Y‬و ‪) Z‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 542(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 542‬ ‫5- ﻋﻨﺪ اﻧﺘﻬﺎﺋﻚ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺸﺎهﺪة ﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎت اﻻرﺗﻔﺎﻋﺎت ﻗﻢ ﺑﻐﻠﻖ ﻧﺎﻓﺬة ‪.Object Viewer‬‬ ‫6- إن آﻨﺖ ﺗﺤﺘﺎج إﻟﻰ اﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎع اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻟﺤﺎﻟﺘﻪ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ اﺳﺘﺨﺪم اﻷﻣﺮ ‪.Undo‬‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺬف ﻃﺒﻘﺎت ﻣﺸﻬﺪ اﻟﻨﻄﺎﻗﺎت ‪.Range View‬‬ ‫7- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Terrain Layers‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪.Range Layers‬‬ ‫8- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﻘﺒﻞ اﻟﺠﻮاب اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ‪ Erase‬ﻟﺘﻤﺴﺢ ﻃﺒﻘﺎت ﻣﺸﻬﺪ اﻟﻨﻄﺎﻗﺎت ‪.Erase range view layers‬‬ ‫ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺎت ﻣﺠﺎري اﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ ‪Delineating Watershed Areas‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺘﻘﺴﻴﻢ اﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ إﻟﻰ أﻣﺎآﻦ ﺗﺠﻤﻊ اﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ ﺑﺒﻨﺎء ﻧﻤﻮذج ﻟﻤﺠﺎري اﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ و اﺳﺘﻴﺮاد ﺣﺪود ﻣﺠﺎري اﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ.‬ ‫1- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Terrain Model Explorer‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﻧﺎﻓﺬة ‪.Terrain Model Explorer‬‬ ‫2- اﺧﺘﺮ اﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ‪ AREA1C‬و ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺘﻪ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ TIN data‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Watershed‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر اﻟﻔﺄرة اﻷﻳﻤﻦ و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫اﺧﺘﺮ ‪) Calculate Watershed‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 642( ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Watershed Parameters‬‬ ‫- 431 -‬
  • 133. By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials 246 ‫ﺷﻜﻞ‬ ‫ ﺛﻢ ﺗﺄآﺪ‬Minimum Depression Area ‫ و 05 ﻣﺘﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ أﻣﺎم‬Minimum Depression Depth ‫3- ادﺧﻞ 1 ﻣﺘﺮ أﻣﺎم‬ .(247 ‫ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬Must exceed both minimum area and minimum depth ‫ﻣﻦ إزاﻟﺔ اﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﻣﻦ أﻣﺎم‬ 247 ‫ﺷﻜﻞ‬ Done ‫ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮر رﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬OK ‫ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬Calculate Watershed ‫ ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار‬OK ‫4- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ .(248 ‫ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬calculating watershed 248 ‫ﺷﻜﻞ‬ .(249 ‫ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬Terrain Model Explorer ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﻋﻦ ﻣﺠﺎري اﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺠﺰء اﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺎﻓﺬة‬ - 135 -
  • 134. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 942‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻻﺳﺘﻴﺮاد ﺣﺪود ﻣﺠﺎري اﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ إﻟﻰ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ.‬ ‫5- اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Watershed‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﺠﺰء اﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺎﻓﺬة ‪ Terrain Model Explorer‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر اﻟﻔﺄرة اﻷﻳﻤﻦ و ﻣﻦ‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Import Watershed Boundaries‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪Watershed Display Settings‬‬ ‫)اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 052(.‬ ‫6- اﻗﺒﻞ آﻞ اﻟﻘﻴﻢ اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺼﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮاري ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) OK‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 052(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 052‬ ‫7- أﻏﻠﻖ ﻧﺎﻓﺬة ‪ Terrain Model Explorer‬و ﺷﺎهﺪ ﺣﺪود ﻣﺠﺎري اﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 152(.‬ ‫- 631 -‬
  • 135. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 152‬ ‫8- ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ اﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﻟﺘﺮى أرﻗﺎم ﻣﺠﺎري اﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ إدراﺟﻬﺎ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 252(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 252‬ ‫- 731 -‬
  • 136. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫اﻟﺪرس اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻊ ﻋﺸﺮ: ﺣﺴﺎب آﻤﻴﺎت ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ‪Lesson 17: Calculating Site Volumes‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺪرس ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ اﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ‪ Site‬و اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ‪ Stratum‬ﻟﺤﺴﺎب اﻟﻜﻤﻴﺎت ‪ Volume Calculation‬ﺛﻢ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺤﺴﺎب اﻟﻜﻤﻴﺎت‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ‪ Grid‬و ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ اﻟﻤﺮآﺒﺎت ‪ Composite‬ﺛﻢ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ اﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎت ‪ Sections‬ﺛﻢ ﺗﻘﺎرن ﺑﻴﻦ اﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻄﺮق اﻟﺜﻼث.‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ هﺬا اﻟﺪرس:‬ ‫1- ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Land Desktop‬‬ ‫2- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ File‬أﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Open‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Open Drawing: Project Based‬‬ ‫إن اﻟﻤﺴﺎر اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻤﺸﺮوع ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﺴﺎر 6002 ‪ C:Land Projects‬ﻓﺈن آﻨﺖ ﻗﺪ ﻏﻴﺮت هﺬا اﻟﻤﺴﺎر أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺼﻴﺐ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻓﻴﺠﺐ أن ﺗﻀﻊ ذﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ اﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎر.‬ ‫3- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Project Name‬اﺧﺘﺮ 1‪ TUTORIAL‬و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Select Project Drawing‬اﺧـﺘـــﺮ -‪Lesson‬‬ ‫‪ 17.dwg‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫4- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Projects‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Workspaces‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Land Desktop‬ﻟﺘﻌﺮض ﻗﻮاﺋﻢ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Land Desktop‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ و اﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ‪Defining a Stratum and a Site‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺴﻄﺤﻴﻦ ‪ EG‬و ‪ FG‬ﺛﻢ ﺗﻘﻮم ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ اﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ و اﻟﺬي ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ اﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ اﻟﻤﺮاد ﺣﺴﺎب اﻟﻜﻤﻴﺎت‬ ‫ﺑﻬﺎ.‬ ‫1- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Select Current Stratum‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪) Define Stratum‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬ ‫352(.‬ ‫2- ادﺧﻞ 1‪ Stratum‬أﻣﺎم ‪ Name‬و ادﺧﻞ ‪ EG and FG Surfaces‬أﻣﺎم ‪) Description‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 352(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 352‬ ‫3- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Select‬ﻟﻠﺴﻄﺢ اﻷول 1 ‪ Surface‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ Select Surface‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ اﻟﺴﻄﺢ ‪ EG‬ﺛﻢ‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮع إﻟﻰ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪) Define Stratum‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 452(.‬ ‫- 831 -‬
  • 137. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 452‬ ‫4- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Select‬ﻟﻠﺴﻄﺢ اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ 2 ‪ Surface‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ Select Surface‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ اﻟﺴﻄﺢ ‪ FG‬ﺛﻢ‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮع إﻟﻰ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Define Stratum‬‬ ‫5- ﺗﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ أن اﻟﺴﻄﺢ اﻷول 1 ‪ Surface‬هﻮ ‪ eg‬و أن اﻟﺴﻄﺢ اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ 2 ‪ Surface‬هﻮ ‪) fg‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 552( ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ OK‬ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺮار.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 552‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ إﻋﺪادات ﺣﺴﺎب اﻟﻜﻤﻴﺎت.‬ ‫6- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Site Definition‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Site Settings‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار‬ ‫‪.Volume Site Settings‬‬ ‫7- ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Volume Labeling‬أدﺧﻞ 3‪ m‬أﻣﺎم اﻟﻼﺣﻘﺔ ‪) Suffix‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 652( ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫- 931 -‬
  • 138. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 652‬ ‫8- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Site Definition‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪.Define Site‬‬ ‫9- أدﺧﻞ 02 درﺟﺔ ‪ Degree‬ﻟﺰاوﻳﺔ اﻟﺪوران.‬ ‫01- أدﺧﻞ ‪ dot P) .P‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺛﻢ اﻟﺤﺮف ‪ (P‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﺨﺪم أداة ﺗﺮﺷﻴﺢ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﺛﻢ ادﺧﻞ 1 ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ أﺻﻞ اﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ‪Site‬‬ ‫‪.Base Point‬‬ ‫إن أدوات اﻟﺘﺮﺷﻴﺢ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪام أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ أواﻣﺮ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ.‬ ‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪم ‪ dot P).P‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺛﻢ اﻟﺤﺮف ‪ (P‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪد رﻗﻢ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ.‬ ‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪم ‪ dot G).G‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺛﻢ اﻟﺤﺮف ‪ (G‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﺨﺘﺎر ﺟﺮاﻓﻴﻚ.‬ ‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪم ‪ dot N).N‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺛﻢ اﻟﺤﺮف ‪ (N‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪد إﺣﺪاﺛﻲ اﻟﺸﻤﺎل و اﻟﺸﺮق.‬ ‫11- ادﺧﻞ 2 ﻣﺘﺮ ﻟﻤﻘﺎس اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻓﻲ اﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ‪) M‬اﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ‪ M‬ﻳﻘﺎﺑﻠﻪ اﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ‪ X‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ اﻹﺣﺪاﺛﻴﺎت( ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﺛﻢ‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Enter‬ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى ﻟﺘﻘﺒﻞ اﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻴﺔ 2 آﻤﻘﺎس ﻟﻠﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻓﻲ اﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ‪) N‬اﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ‪ N‬ﻳﻘﺎﺑﻠﻪ اﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ‪ Y‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫اﻹﺣﺪاﺛﻴﺎت(.‬ ‫21- ادﺧﻞ ‪ dot P).P‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺛﻢ اﻟﺤﺮف ‪ (P‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﻌﻄﻴﻞ أداة ﺗﺮﺷﻴﺢ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﺛﻢ و ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟـ ‪Endpoint OSNAP‬‬ ‫اﺧﺘﺮ اﻟﺮآﻦ اﻷﻳﻤﻦ اﻟﻌﻠﻮي ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﻌﺪد ﺧﻄﻮط ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ اﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 752(.‬ ‫- 041 -‬
  • 139. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 752‬ ‫31- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﻘﺒﻞ اﻟﺠﻮاب اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ‪ No‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ زاوﻳﺔ اﻟﺪوران أو ﻣﻘﺎس اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ‪change the size or‬‬ ‫‪ ،rotation of the grid‬ﺛﻢ ادﺧﻞ ‪ No‬ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺣﺪود اﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ اﻟﻘﺪﻳﻤﺔ ‪ erase the old site outline‬و اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪.Enter‬‬ ‫41- أدﺧﻞ 1‪ Site‬ﻻﺳﻢ اﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Enter‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ و اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ أﺻﺒﺢ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ اﻟﺴﻄﺤﻴﻦ و ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺴﺎب اﻟﻜﻤﻴﺎت.‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎب اﻟﻜﻤﻴﺎت ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ‪Calculating Grid Volumes‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺤﺴﺎب اﻟﻜﻤﻴﺎت ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ، إن هﺬﻩ اﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﻮم ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺮآﻴﺐ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ آﻼ ﺳﻄﺤﻲ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ، ﺛﻢ اﺳﺘﺨﺮاج‬ ‫اﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﻴﺐ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﺎط اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ و ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﻘﺎرﻧﺔ اﻟﻤﻨﺴﻮب ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺮاج اﻟﻔﺎرق ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ آﻞ ﺧﻄﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ.‬ ‫1- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Grid Volumes‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Calculate Total Site Volume‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض‬ ‫ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Site Librarian‬‬ ‫2- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Select site‬اﺧﺘﺮ 1‪) Site‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 852( ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪Grid Volume‬‬ ‫‪.Settings‬‬ ‫- 141 -‬
  • 140. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 852‬ ‫3- أﻗﺒﻞ آﻞ اﻟﻘﻴﻢ اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) OK‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 952( ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪Volume‬‬ ‫‪.Results Surface‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 952‬ ‫4- أدﺧﻞ 1‪ G1-Site‬أﻣﺎم ‪ New Surface‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪) OK‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 062(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 062‬ ‫ﻟﻮ آﻨﺖ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻤﻮاﻗﻊ و ﻃﺒﻘﺎت ﻋﺪة ﻓﻤﻦ اﻷﻓﻀﻞ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﺳﻢ ﻷﺳﻄﺢ اﻟﻜﻤﻴﺎت ذات ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ اﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎب اﻟﻜﻤﻴﺔ و ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫أﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺤﻴﺪ اﻻﺳﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻒ اﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻓﻲ ‪ Terrain Model Explorer‬ﻋﻨﺪ إﻧﺸﺎء اﻷﺳﻄﺢ.‬ ‫ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺣﺴﺎب اﻟﻜﻤﻴﺎت ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﺮ اﻷواﻣﺮ ‪ Command Line‬آﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ 6733 ﻣﺘﺮ ﻣﻜﻌﺐ ﻟﻠﺤﻔﺮ و 08302‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺮ ﻣﻜﻌﺐ ﻟﻠﺮدم و 40071 ﻣﺘﺮ ﻣﻜﻌﺐ ﻟﺼﺎﻓﻲ اﻟﻜﻤﻴﺔ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 162(.‬ ‫- 241 -‬
  • 141. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 162‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺈﻇﻬﺎر ﺣﺪود اﻟﺴﻄﺢ ‪ FG‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻄﺢ اﻟﻜﻤﻴﺔ اﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ.‬ ‫5- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ View‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Named Views‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ View‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ 2 ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺖ ‪ Named‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ Set Current‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫6- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ أﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺎت ‪ Layers‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ‪ Layer Properties Manager‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺮض اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ -‪Fg-srf‬‬ ‫‪) bdr‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 262( ﻟﻌﺮض ﺣﺪود اﻟﺴﻄﺢ ‪ FG‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻹﻏﻼق ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 262‬ ‫7- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Set Current Surface‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ Select Surface‬و ﻣﻦ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار‬ ‫اﺧﺘﺮ ‪) Volume Surface‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 362( ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ اﻟﺴﻄﺢ 1‪ G1-Site‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻷﺳﻄﺢ ﺛﻢ أﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 362‬ ‫8- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Surface Display‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪) Quick View‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 462(.‬ ‫- 341 -‬
  • 142. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 462‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺣﺪود اﻟﺴﻄﺢ ‪ FG‬و اﻣﺘﺪاد ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺳﻄﺢ اﻟﻜﻤﻴﺎت ﺗﻢ اﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺴﺎب اﻟﻜﻤﻴﺎت.‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺑﻌﺎت اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻊ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎ ﺧﺎرج ﺣﺪود اﻟﺴﻄﺢ ‪ FG‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺠﺎهﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺴﺎب اﻟﻜﻤﻴﺎت، و ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻔﺎدي ذﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﺳﻄﺤﻴﻦ ﺑﺤﺪود‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ أو ﺑﻠﺼﻖ اﻟﺴﻄﺢ اﻟﻤﻌﻨﻲ ‪ FG‬ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺴﻄﺢ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ‪ ،EG‬و آﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ اﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ‪ M‬و ‪ N‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﺳﻴﻨﺘﺞ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﻪ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻋﺪد اﻟﻤﺮﺑﻌﺎت اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻊ ﺧﺎرج اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ.‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎب اﻟﻜﻤﻴﺎت ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ اﻟﻤﺮآﺒﺎت ‪Calculating Composite Volumes‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺤﺴﺎب اﻟﻜﻤﻴﺎت ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ اﻟﻤﺮآﺒﺎت.‬ ‫1- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ View‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Named Views‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ View‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ 1 ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺖ ‪ Named‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ Set Current‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫2- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Composite Volumes‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪Calculate Total Site Volume‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Site Volume Librarian‬‬ ‫3- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Select site‬اﺧﺘﺮ 1‪) Site‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 562( ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪Composite‬‬ ‫‪.Volume Settings‬‬ ‫- 441 -‬
  • 143. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 562‬ ‫4- أﻗﺒﻞ آﻞ اﻟﻘﻴﻢ اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) OK‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 662( ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪Volume‬‬ ‫‪.Results Surface‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 662‬ ‫5- أدﺧﻞ 1‪ C1-Site‬أﻣﺎم ‪) New surface‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 762( ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 762‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض اﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻟﺤﺴﺎب اﻟﻜﻤﻴﺎت ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ اﻟﻤﺮآﺒﺎت ‪ Composite‬ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﺮ اﻷواﻣﺮ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 862( ‪Command Line‬‬ ‫آﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ 5743 ﻣﺘﺮ ﻣﻜﻌﺐ ﻟﻠﺤﻔﺮ و 04902 ﻣﺘﺮ ﻣﻜﻌﺐ ﻟﻠﺮدم و 56471 ﻣﺘﺮ ﻣﻜﻌﺐ ﻟﺼﺎﻓﻲ اﻟﻜﻤﻴﺔ.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 862‬ ‫- 541 -‬
  • 144. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻔﺘﺢ ﻧﺎﻓﺬة اﻟـ ‪ Terrain Model Explorer‬و ﺗﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺳﻄﺢ اﻟﻜﻤﻴﺎت 1‪.C1-Site‬‬ ‫6- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Terrain Model Explorer‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض اﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬة ‪.Terrain Model Explorer‬‬ ‫7- ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺖ اﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ‪ Volume‬اﺧﺘﺮ 1‪ C1-Site‬و ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر اﻟﻔﺄرة اﻷﻳﻤﻦ و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪Surface Display‬‬ ‫و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪.Quick View‬‬ ‫8- ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻧﺎﻓﺬة ‪ Terrain Model Explorer‬ﺟﺎﻧﺒﺎ ﻟﺘﺮى اﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 962(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 962‬ ‫9- ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻏﻼق ﻧﺎﻓﺬة ‪ Terrain Model Explorer‬و ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﺮ اﻷواﻣﺮ أدﺧﻞ ‪ Redraw‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﻤﺤﻮ ﺧﻄﻮط ﺳﻄﺢ‬ ‫اﻟﻜﻤﻴﺎت ﻣﻦ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ.‬ ‫ﻣﻊ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ اﻟﻤﺮآﺒﺎت ﻻ ﻳﺤﺪث ﻗﻄﻊ آﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ اﻟﻤﺮﺑﻌﺎت و ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺧﻄﻮط ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺜﻠﺜﺎت، ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ذات دﻗﺔ‬ ‫أﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻃﺮﻗﺔ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻓﻔﻲ اﻟﻤﺜﺎل اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﺻﺎﻓﻲ آﻤﻴﺔ اﻟﺤﻔﺮ و اﻟﺮدم آﺎن 56471 ﻣﺘﺮ ﻣﻜﻌﺐ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ اﻟﻤﺮآﺒﺎت ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ آﺎﻧﺖ‬ ‫اﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ 40071 ﻣﺘﺮ ﻣﻜﻌﺐ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ.‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎب اﻟﻜﻤﻴﺎت ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ اﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎت ‪Calculating Section Method Volumes‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺤﺴﺎب اﻟﻜﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ اﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎت، ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ اﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎت ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺣﺴﺎب ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ اﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎت اﻟﻤﺘﺠﺎورة و ﺗﻀﺮب ﻓﻲ‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺎت ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﻢ.‬ ‫أوﻻ، ﺟﻤﻊ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ اﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎت ‪ Average End Area Sections‬ﻟﻜﻼ اﻟﺴﻄﺤﻴﻦ.‬ ‫1- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Section Volumes‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Sample Sections‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق‬ ‫اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Site Volume Librarian‬‬ ‫2- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Select site‬اﺧﺘﺮ 1‪) Site‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 072( ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪Section‬‬ ‫‪.Volume Settings‬‬ ‫- 641 -‬
  • 145. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 072‬ ‫3- ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Volume Calculation Type‬ﺗﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ‪ Average end area‬ﺛﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Direction‬اﺧﺘﺮ )‪M (x‬‬ ‫)اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 172(.‬ ‫4- ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Volume Corrections‬اﻗﺒﻞ اﻟﻘﻴﻢ اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﻌﺎﻣﻼت ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ اﻟﻜﻤﻴﺎت )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 172( ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪OK‬‬ ‫ﻟﺒﺪء ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻊ اﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎت ﻟﻜﻼ اﻟﺴﻄﺤﻴﻦ.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 172‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺑﺪء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﺠﻤﻴﻊ و ﻋﺮض ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﺮ اﻷواﻣﺮ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 272(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 272‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺴﺐ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺎت اﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎت ﻟﻠﻤﻮﻗﻊ.‬ ‫5- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Section Volumes‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Calculate Volume Total‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض‬ ‫ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Site Volume Librarian‬‬ ‫6- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Select site‬اﺧﺘﺮ 1‪ ) Site‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 372( ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪Section‬‬ ‫‪.Volume Settings‬‬ ‫- 741 -‬
  • 146. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 372‬ ‫7- اﻗﺒﻞ آﻞ اﻟﻘﻴﻢ اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪) Section Volume Settings‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 472( ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﺛﻢ‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Enter‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 472‬ ‫ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺣﺴﺎب اﻟﻜﻤﻴﺎت ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ اﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎت ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﺮ اﻷواﻣﺮ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 572( ‪ Command Line‬آﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ 8743 ﻣﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻜﻌﺐ ﻟﻠﺤﻔﺮ و 21012 ﻣﺘﺮ ﻣﻜﻌﺐ ﻟﻠﺮدم و 43571 ﻣﺘﺮ ﻣﻜﻌﺐ ﻟﺼﺎﻓﻲ اﻟﻜﻤﻴﺔ.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 572‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎهﺪة ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺮ اﻟﻜﻤﻴﺎت ‪Viewing the Volume Report‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻠﻘﻲ ﻧﻈﺮة ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ اﻟﻜﻤﻴﺎت ﻣﻦ ﺛﻼث ﻃﺮق اﻟﺤﺴﺎب اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ.‬ ‫1- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Volume Reports‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Site Reports‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار‬ ‫‪) Site Volume Corrections‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 672(.‬ ‫2- اﻗﺒﻞ آﻞ اﻟﻘﻴﻢ اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 672( ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﻧﺎﻓﺬة ‪.Site Volumes‬‬ ‫- 841 -‬
  • 147. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 672‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻆ أن اﻟﺜﻼث ﻃﺮق ﺗﻌﻄﻲ آﻤﻴﺎت ﻣﺘﻘﺎرﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼف ﻣﻘﺪارﻩ %3 ﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ أآﺒﺮ آﻤﻴﺔ ) ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ‪(Section Average End Area‬‬ ‫43571 ﻣﺘﺮ ﻣﻜﻌﺐ و ﻗﻴﻤﺔ أﻗﻞ آﻤﻴﺔ )ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ‪ 17004 (Grid‬ﻣﺘﺮ ﻣﻜﻌﺐ.‬ ‫ﻳﻨﺼﺢ ﺑﺈﺗﺒﺎع اﻟﻄﺮق اﻟﺜﻼث ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎب اﻟﻜﻤﻴﺎت ﻟﻠﻤﻮﻗﻊ، و إن آﺎﻧﺖ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ اﻟﻤﺮآﺒﺎت ‪ Composite‬هﻲ أدق اﻟﻄﺮق و ﻟﻜﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ اﻋﺘﻤﺎد‬ ‫اﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ اﻟﺜﻼث ﺣﻴﺚ أن اﻟﻔﺮوق ﺑﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻌﺪى اﻟـ %5 و ﻟﻜﻦ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ اﻟﻔﺮق ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﺤﺴﺎﺑﺎت ﻏﻴﺮ اﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ.‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ اﻧﺘﻬﺎﺋﻚ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺸﺎهﺪة ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎت اﻟﻜﻤﻴﺎت )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 772( اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 772‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎب آﻤﻴﺔ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ أرض ‪Calculating Parcel Volumes‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ اﻷﺣﻴﺎن ﺗﺤﺘﺎج إﻟﻰ ﺣﺴﺎب اﻟﻜﻤﻴﺎت ﻟﺠﺰء ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ، و ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ اﻟﻨﻄﺎﻗﺎت اﻟﺠﻐﺮاﻓﻴﺔ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺴﺎب اﻟﻜﻤﻴﺎت ﻟﻠﻨﻄﺎﻗﺎت اﻷﺻﻐﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺪة.‬ ‫- 941 -‬
  • 148. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪم ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ‪ Parcel Volumes‬ﻟﺤﺴﺎب اﻟﻜﻤﻴﺎت ﻟﻘﻄﻊ اﻷراﺿﻲ اﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮة، أوﻻ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ اﻷرض ‪ Parcel‬ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر إﺣﺪى‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻌﺪدي اﻟﺨﻄﻮط ﺣﺪود ﻗﻄﻊ اﻷراﺿﻲ ‪ Parcels Boundary Polylines‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ.‬ ‫1- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ أﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺎت ‪) Layers‬أو ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈدﺧﺎل ‪ Layer‬ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﺮ اﻷواﻣﺮ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪ (Enter‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار‬ ‫‪ Layer Properties Manager‬و ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺮض اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ‪ Subsites‬ﻟﺘﻌﺮض ﺣﺪود ﻗﻄﻊ اﻷراﺿﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺛﻢ‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫2- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Parcels‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Define from Polylines‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺘﻌﺪد اﻟﺨﻄﻮط اﻷﺻﻔﺮ ﺣﻮل اﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ اﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﻄﻮط‬ ‫اﻟﺼﻔﺮاء اﻟﻌﺮﺿﻴﺔ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 872( ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻹﻧﻬﺎء اﻷﻣﺮ.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 872‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺤﺴﺎب اﻟﻜﻤﻴﺎت ﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ اﻷرض اﻷوﻟﻰ 1 ‪.Parcel‬‬ ‫3- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Grid Volumes‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Calculate Parcel Volumes‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض‬ ‫ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Site Volume Librarian‬‬ ‫4- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Select site‬اﺧﺘﺮ 1‪) Site‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 972( ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪Parcel‬‬ ‫‪.Volume Librarian‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 972‬ ‫- 051 -‬
  • 149. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫5- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Select parcel‬اﺧﺘﺮ 1 )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 082( ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 082‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺣﺴﺎب اﻟﻜﻤﻴﺎت ﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ اﻷرض ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﺮ اﻷواﻣﺮ ‪) Command Line‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 182( آﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ 8502 ﻣﺘﺮ ﻣﻜﻌﺐ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﻔﺮ و 6533 ﻣﺘﺮ ﻣﻜﻌﺐ ﻟﻠﺮدم و 8921 ﻣﺘﺮ ﻣﻜﻌﺐ ﻟﺼﺎﻓﻲ اﻟﻜﻤﻴﺔ.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 182‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺧﻄﻮط آﻨﺘﻮر ﻟﻠﺤﻔﺮ و اﻟﺮدم ‪Generating Cut and Fill Contours‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺘﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺧﻄﻮط آﻨﺘﻮر ﻟﻠﺤﻔﺮ و اﻟﺮدم ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎ ﺳﻄﺢ اﻟﻜﻤﻴﺎت 1‪.C1-Site‬‬ ‫1- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ أﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺎت ‪) Layers‬أو ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈدﺧﺎل ‪ Layer‬ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﺮ اﻷواﻣﺮ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪ (Enter‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار‬ ‫‪ Layer Properties Manager‬و ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻋﺮض اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺘﺎن ‪ Subsites‬و ‪ Fg-srf-bdr‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫2- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Set Current Surface‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Select Surface‬‬ ‫3- اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Volume Surface‬ﺛﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Select surface to open‬اﺧﺘﺮ 1‪) C1-Site‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 282( ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫- 151 -‬
  • 150. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 282‬ ‫4- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Create Contours‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Create Contours‬‬ ‫5- ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Intervals‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Both Minor and Major‬و أدﺧﻞ 5.0 ﻣﺘﺮ أﻣﺎم ‪ Minor Interval‬و 5.2 أﻣﺎم ‪Major‬‬ ‫‪) Interval‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 382(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 382‬ ‫6- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻞ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﻘﺒﻞ اﻟﺠﻮاب اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ‪ Yes‬ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺧﻄﻮط اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر اﻟﻘﺪﻳﻤﺔ ‪Erase old‬‬ ‫‪.contours‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ رﺳﻢ ﺧﻄﻮط آﻨﺘﻮر اﻟﺤﻔﺮ و اﻟﺮدم ﻟﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﻋﻤﻖ اﻟﺘﺴﻮﻳﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ اﻟﺤﻔﺮ و اﻟﺮدم ﻋﺒﺮ اﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 482(.‬ ‫- 251 -‬
  • 151. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 482‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺎت اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ و اﻟﻌﻨﻮﻧﺔ ‪Generating Grid Ticks and Labels‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺘﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺎت ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ و ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ ﻹﻇﻬﺎر ﻗﻴﻢ اﻟﺤﻔﺮ و اﻟﺮدم ﻓﻲ ﻧﻘﺎط ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺧﻄﻮط اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ.‬ ‫1- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Grid Volumes‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Grid Volume Ticks‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق‬ ‫اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Site Volume Librarian‬‬ ‫2- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Select site‬اﺧﺘﺮ 1‪) Site‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 582( ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪Grid Volume‬‬ ‫‪.Ticks‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 582‬ ‫- 351 -‬
  • 152. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫3- ادﺧﻞ 5 أﻣﺎم ‪ Tick interval‬و أﻳﻀﺎ 5 أﻣﺎم ‪ Label interval‬ﺛﻢ أدﺧﻞ 1 أﻣﺎم ‪) Label precision‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 682(.‬ ‫4- ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Label Position‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪) Right‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 682( ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 682‬ ‫5- ﺛﻢ أدﺧﻞ ‪ No‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﻌﺪم ﻣﺴﺢ اﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎت اﻟﻘﺪﻳﻤﺔ ‪.Erase old grid ticks‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺎت اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ و اﻟﻌﻨﻮﻧﺔ.‬ ‫6- ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ اﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﻟﺘﺮى إﺣﺪى ﻋﻼﻣﺎت اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ و اﻟﻌﻨﻮﻧﺔ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 782(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 782‬ ‫- 451 -‬
  • 153. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫اﻟﺪرس اﻟﺜﺎﻣﻦ ﻋﺸﺮ: رﺳﻢ اﻟﻤﻤﺎس و اﻟﻤﻨﺤﻨﻰ و اﻟﺤﻠﺰون ‪Lesson 18: Drawing Tangents, Curves, and Spirals‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺪرس ﺳﺘﺘﻌﻠﻢ آﻴﻔﻴﺔ إﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﻤﺎس ‪ Tangent‬و ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻰ ‪ Curve‬و ﺣﻠﺰون ‪ Spiral‬ﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺧﻂ اﻧﺤﻴﺎز ﺧﻂ اﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‬ ‫‪ ، Alignment Centerline‬و ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﺧﻂ اﻧﺤﻴﺎز ﺟﺪﻳﺪ و ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺧﻄﻮط أﺧﺮى ﻣﻮﺟﻮدة ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻤﺎس ﺑﻤﻨﺤﻨﻰ داﺋﺮي‬ ‫و ﺣﻠﺰون، و اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﺟﺪاول اﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻓﻲ رﺳﻢ اﻟﻤﻨﺤﻨﻰ و إﻳﺼﺎل ﻋﺪة ﺧﻄﻮط اﻧﺤﻴﺎز.‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ هﺬا اﻟﺪرس:‬ ‫1- ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Land Desktop‬‬ ‫2- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ File‬أﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Open‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Open Drawing: Project Based‬‬ ‫إن اﻟﻤﺴﺎر اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻤﺸﺮوع ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﺴﺎر 6002 ‪ C:Land Projects‬ﻓﺈن آﻨﺖ ﻗﺪ ﻏﻴﺮت هﺬا اﻟﻤﺴﺎر أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺼﻴﺐ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻓﻴﺠﺐ أن ﺗﻀﻊ ذﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ اﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎر.‬ ‫3- ﻣــــﻦ ﻗﺎﺋـــــﻤﺔ ‪ Project Name‬اﺧﺘﺮ 2‪ TUTORIAL‬و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Select Project Drawing‬اﺧــــﺘــﺮ‬ ‫‪ Lesson-18.dwg‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫4- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Projects‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Workspaces‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Land Desktop‬ﻟﺘﻌﺮض ﻗﻮاﺋﻢ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Land Desktop‬‬ ‫رﺳﻢ ﻣﻤﺎس ‪Drawing Tangents‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺮﺳﻢ ﻣﻤﺎس ﻣﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ آﺎﺋﻨﺎن ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﻌﺪدي اﻟﺨﻄﻮط ‪ ،Polylines‬إﺣﺪى اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﺳﺘﺤﺪد ﺑﺎﻹﺣﺪاﺛﻴﺎت، و آﺘﻠﺔ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ‬ ‫‪ Station Block‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪد ﺧﻂ ﻣﺤﺎذاة اﻟﻜﻮﺑﺮي اﻟﺬي ﻳﻌﺒﺮ ﻓﻮق ﺧﻂ اﻧﺤﻴﺎز اﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ.‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ View‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Named Views‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ View‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ 2 ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺖ ‪ Named‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫1-‬ ‫‪ Set Current‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Lines/Curves‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Line‬ﺛﻢ أدﺧﻞ ‪ dot P) .P‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺛﻢ اﻟﺤﺮف ‪ (P‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﺨﺪم أداة ﺗﺮﺷﻴﺢ‬ ‫2-‬ ‫اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﺛﻢ ادﺧﻞ 1 و اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻧﻘﻄﺔ اﻟﺒﺪء.‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ادﺧﻞ 2 و اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﻠﻨﻘﻄﺔ اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.‬ ‫3-‬ ‫أدﺧﻞ ‪ dot N) .N‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺛﻢ اﻟﺤﺮف ‪ (N‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﺨﺪم أداة ﺗﺮﺷﻴﺢ اﻹﺣﺪاﺛﻴﺎت ﺛﻢ ادﺧﻞ 5433.7568105‬ ‫4-‬ ‫آﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﻺﺣﺪاﺛﻲ اﻟﺸﻤﺎﻟﻲ ‪ Northing‬و اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﺛﻢ أدﺧﻞ 9909.727372 آﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﻺﺣﺪاﺛﻲ اﻟﺸﺮﻗﻲ ‪Easting‬‬ ‫و اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Enter‬‬ ‫أدﺧﻞ ‪ dot N) .N‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺛﻢ اﻟﺤﺮف ‪ (N‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﻌﻄﻴﻞ أداة ﺗﺮﺷﻴﺢ اﻹﺣﺪاﺛﻴﺎت، ﺛﻢ اﺳﺘﺨﺪم ‪Insertion Osnap‬‬ ‫5-‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺨﺘﺎر آﺘﻠﺔ اﻟﻤﺤﻄﺔ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 882( إﻟﻰ اﻟﺸﻤﺎل ﻣﻦ اﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ آﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ.‬ ‫أﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ.‬ ‫6-‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 882‬ ‫ﺻﺎر ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ اﻵن ﺛﻼث ﻣﻤﺎﺳﺎت ﻟﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺤﺎذاة اﻟﻜﻮﺑﺮي )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 982(.‬ ‫- 551 -‬
  • 154. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 982‬ ‫رﺳﻢ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻴﺎت ‪Drawing Curves‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺮﺳﻢ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻰ داﺋﺮي ‪ Circular Curve‬ﺑﻨﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮ 007 ﻣﺘﺮ ﺑﻴﻦ اﻟﺜﻼث ﻣﻤﺎﺳﺎت اﻟﻼﺗﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺮﺳﻤﻬﻢ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ.‬ ‫1- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Lines/Curves‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Curve Between Two Lines‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ﺧﻂ اﻟﻤﻤﺎس اﻷول )اﻟﺨﻂ اﻟﺬي ﻳﻘﻊ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﻴﻦ 1 و 2( ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ﺧﻂ اﻟﻤﻤﺎس اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ.‬ ‫2- ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻤﻌﺎﻣﻞ ‪ Factor‬اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ اﻟﻤﻨﺤﻨﻰ و هﻮ ‪ Radius‬ﺛﻢ أدﺧﻞ 007 آﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﻨﺼﻒ‬ ‫اﻟﻘﻄﺮ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Enter‬‬ ‫3- اﺧﺘﺮ ﺧﻂ اﻟﻤﻤﺎس اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ﺧﻂ اﻟﻤﻤﺎس اﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ.‬ ‫4- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻤﻌﺎﻣﻞ ‪ Factor‬اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ اﻟﻤﻨﺤﻨﻰ و هﻮ ‪ Radius‬ﺛﻢ أدﺧﻞ 007 آﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﻨﺼﻒ اﻟﻘﻄﺮ‬ ‫ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﻹﻧﻬﺎء اﻷﻣﺮ.‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﺜﻼث ﻣﻤﺎﺳﺎت ﺑﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﺎت داﺋﺮﻳﺔ ﻹآﻤﺎل ﺧﻂ ﻣﺤﺎذاة اﻟﻜﻮﺑﺮي )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 092(.‬ ‫- 651 -‬
  • 155. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 092‬ ‫رﺳﻢ ﺣﻠﺰون ‪Drawing Spirals‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺮﺳﻢ ﻧﻈﺎم ﺣﻠﺰون-ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻰ-ﺣﻠﺰون ‪ Spiral-Curve-Spiral‬ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ أﺟﺰاء ﻣﻤﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪Tangent Segments‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺤﺎذاة اﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ.‬ ‫أوﻻ، ﺗﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻧﻚ ﺳﺘﺴﺘﺨﺪم اﻟﺤﻠﺰون ‪.Clothoid‬‬ ‫1- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ View‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Named Views‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ View‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ 3 ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺖ ‪ Named‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ Set Current‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫2- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Lines/Curves‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Create Spirals‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Spiral Type‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار‬ ‫‪) Spiral Type‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 192(.‬ ‫3- ﺗﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ‪) Clothoid‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 192( ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 192‬ ‫- 751 -‬
  • 156. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫4- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Lines/Curves‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Create Spirals‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Fit Tangent-Tangent‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض‬ ‫ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Fit Spirals - Tangent to Tangent‬‬ ‫5- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Description‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪) Spiral-Curve-Spiral‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 292( ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 292‬ ‫6- اﺧﺘﺮ اﻟﻤﻤﺎس اﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ اﻟﻤﻤﺎس اﻷﻳﻤﻦ.‬ ‫7- أدﺧﻞ 058 آﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﻠـ ‪ Radius‬ﺛﻢ أدﺧﻞ 003 آﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻟـ ‪.Spiral A in‬‬ ‫8- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﻘﺒﻞ اﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ 003 ﻟـ ‪ Spiral A out‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Enter‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﻤﻤﺎﺳﺎن ﺑﺤﻠﺰون و ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻰ ﻧﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮﻩ 058 ﻣﺘﺮ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 392(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 392‬ ‫اﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺠﺪاول اﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪Working with Speed Tables‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﺟﺪاول اﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻧﻈﺎم ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻴﺎت ﻟﺠﺰء ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻂ اﻧﺤﻴﺎز اﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ ‪ ،Roadway Alignment‬ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ‬ ‫اﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ ﻳﻬﺪف إﻟﻰ ارﺗﻔﺎع ﻣﺘﺰاﻳﺪ ‪ Superelevation‬ﻟﻤﻨﺤﻨﻰ اﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ، ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﻨﺴﺦ ﺟﺪول اﻟﺴﺮﻋﺎت 60‪ Canada‬ﻟﺘﺼﻤﻢ ﻣﻨﻪ ﺟﺪول‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻨﺎء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ 110 km/hr‬و ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻰ ﻧﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮﻩ 0001 ﻣﺘﺮ.‬ ‫1- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ View‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Named Views‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ View‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ 4 ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺖ ‪ Named‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ Set Current‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫- 851 -‬
  • 157. By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials ‫ ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض‬Edit Speed Table ‫ و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ‬Speed Tables ‫ اﺧﺘﺮ‬Lines/Curves ‫2- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ .Select Speed Table ‫ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار‬ ‫ ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار‬OK ‫ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 492( ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬canada06.sup ‫ اﺧﺘﺮ‬Speed Table ‫3- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ .Horizontal Speed Table 294 ‫ﺷﻜﻞ‬ .(295 ‫ 011 )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬km/hr ‫ اﺧﺘﺮ‬Design Speed ‫4- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ .Save Horizontal Speed Table ‫ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 592( ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار‬Save As ‫5- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ 295 ‫ﺷﻜﻞ‬ Horizontal ‫ ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮع إﻟﻰ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار‬Save ‫ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 692( ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬File Name ‫ أﻣﺎم‬Tutorial ‫6- ادﺧﻞ‬ .Speed Table - 159 -
  • 158. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 692‬ ‫7- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺼﻒ اﻟﺜﺎﻣﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺟﺪول اﻟﺴﺮﻋﺎت )‪ (1000 m radius curve‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Edit‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق‬ ‫اﻟﺤﻮار ‪) New/Edit Speed Table Item‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 792(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 792‬ ‫8- ادﺧﻞ 053 أﻣﺎم ‪) 4 Lane Spi A‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 892( ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮع إﻟﻰ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪Horizontal‬‬ ‫‪.Speed Table‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 892‬ ‫- 061 -‬
  • 159. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫9- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Save‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻧﻈﺎم ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻰ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ذو أرﺑﻊ ﻣﺠﺎزات ﺑﻨﺎءا ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺪول اﻟﺴﺮﻋﺎت ‪ Tutorial‬ﻟﺨﻂ اﻧﺤﻴﺎز اﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ.‬ ‫01- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Lines/Curves‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Speed Tables‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪.Create Curves‬‬ ‫11- اﺧﺘﺮ اﻟﻤﻤﺎس اﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ اﻟﻤﻤﺎس اﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪) Horizontal Speed Table‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 992(.‬ ‫21- ﺗﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ أن ‪ Tutorial.sup‬هﻮ ﺟﺪول اﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ، و أن ‪ 110 km/hr‬هﻲ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ اﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ اﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎرة )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 992(.‬ ‫31- ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺼﻒ اﻟﺜﺎﻣﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺟﺪول اﻟﺴﺮﻋﺎت )‪) (1000 m radius‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 992( ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض‬ ‫ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Select‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 992‬ ‫41- اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Four Lanes‬ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﻈﺎم اﻟﺤﻠﺰون-ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻰ-ﺣﻠﺰون ‪) Spiral-Curve-Spiral System‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 003(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 003‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﻤﻤﺎﺳﺎت ﺑﻨﻈﺎم ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻴﺎت ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪﻩ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺟﺪول اﻟﺴﺮﻋﺎت اﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 103(.‬ ‫- 161 -‬
  • 160. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 103‬ ‫رﺑﻂ ﻋﺪة آﺎﺋﻨﺎت ﺧﻄﻮط اﻧﺤﻴﺎز ‪Attaching Multiple Alignment Objects‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﻨﺤﺪر ‪ Ramp‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮوج، ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ رﺑﻂ ﻋﺪة آﺎﺋﻨﺎت ﺧﻄﻮط اﻧﺤﻴﺎز ‪،Alignment Objects‬‬ ‫أوﻻ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﺧﻂ ﻣﺰاح ‪ Offset‬ﻋﻦ ﺧﻂ اﻻﻧﺤﻴﺎز ‪ Alignment‬ﺑـ 62 ﻣﺘﺮ ﻧﺤﻮ اﻟﺠﻨﻮب آﺒﺪاﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻄﺮﻳﻖ اﻟﻤﻨﺤﺪر.‬ ‫1- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ View‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Named Views‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ View‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ 5 ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺖ ‪ Named‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ Set Current‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫2- ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﺮ اﻷواﻣﺮ اآﺘﺐ ‪ Offset‬و اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﺛﻢ ادﺧﻞ 62 آﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ‪ Distance‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ﺧﻂ اﻻﻧﺤﻴﺎز اﻷﻳﺴﺮ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ اﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ اﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ.‬ ‫3- اﺧﺘﺮ أي ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﻊ أﺳﻔﻞ ﺧﻂ اﻻﻧﺤﻴﺎز آﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﻟﻠﺨﻂ اﻟﻤﺰاح )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 203( ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻹﻧﻬﺎء اﻷﻣﺮ.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 203‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻀﻴﻒ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻰ ﻧﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮﻩ 0821 ﻣﺘﺮ ﻟﻠﻄﺮف اﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ اﻟﻤﻨﺤﺪر.‬ ‫4- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Lines/Curves‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪.Attach Multiple‬‬ ‫5- اﺧﺘﺮ اﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ اﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ اﻟﻤﻨﺤﺪر اﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ‪.Endpoint Osnap‬‬ ‫6- أدﺧﻞ ‪ A‬ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎر ‪ Arc‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﻘﺒﻞ اﻟﺨﻴﺎر اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ‪.Radius‬‬ ‫7- أدﺧﻞ 0821 آﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﻨﺼﻒ اﻟﻘﻄﺮ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﻘﺒﻞ اﻟﺨﻴﺎر اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ‪ Length‬ﺛﻢ ادﺧﻞ 8.602 آﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﻄﻮل.‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺣﻠﺰون ﻣﺮآﺐ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻰ.‬ ‫- 261 -‬
  • 161. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫8- أدﺧﻞ ‪ S‬ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎر ‪ Spiral‬ﺛﻢ ادﺧﻞ ‪ C‬ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎر ‪.Compound‬‬ ‫9- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﻘﺒﻞ اﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻴﺔ 0821 آﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﻨﺼﻒ اﻟﻘﻄﺮ.‬ ‫01- ادﺧﻞ ‪ L‬ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎر ‪ Length‬ﺛﻢ ادﺧﻞ 793.45 آﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﻄﻮل.‬ ‫11- ادﺧﻞ 052 آﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﻨﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮ اﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ‪.Ending Radius‬‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺮﺑﻂ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻰ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻟﻠﺤﻠﺰون اﻟﻤﺮآﺐ.‬ ‫21- ادﺧﻞ ‪ A‬ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎر ‪ Arc‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﻘﺒﻞ اﻟﺨﻴﺎر اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ‪ Radius‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Enter‬ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى ﻟﺘﻘﺒﻞ اﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ 052‬ ‫آﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﻨﺼﻒ اﻟﻘﻄﺮ.‬ ‫31- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﻘﺒﻞ اﻟﺨﻴﺎر اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ‪ Length‬ﺛﻢ ادﺧﻞ 403.601 ﻣﺘﺮ آﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﻄﻮل.‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺮﺑﻂ ﺣﻠﺰون ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺤﻨﻰ.‬ ‫41- ادﺧﻞ ‪ S‬ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎر ‪ Spiral‬ﺛﻢ ادﺧﻞ ‪ O‬ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎر ‪.Outcurve‬‬ ‫51- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﻘﺒﻞ اﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ 052 آﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﻨﺼﻒ اﻟﻘﻄﺮ ﺛﻢ ادﺧﻞ ‪ A‬ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎر ‪ A Factor‬ﺛﻢ ادﺧﻞ 516.641 آﻤﻌﺎﻣﻞ ‪.A‬‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﻬﻲ ﺧﻂ اﻧﺤﻴﺎز اﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ اﻟﻤﻨﺤﺪر ‪ Ramp Alignment‬ﺑﺮﺳﻢ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻣﻤﺎس.‬ ‫61- ادﺧﻞ ‪ T‬ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎر ‪ Tangent‬ﺛﻢ ادﺧﻞ 610.602 آﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﻄﻮل.‬ ‫71- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﻨﻬﻲ اﻷﻣﺮ.‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﺜﻴﻞ ﺧﻂ اﻧﺤﻴﺎز اﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ اﻟﻤﻨﺤﺪر ﺑﻌﺪة ﺧﻄﻮط اﻧﺤﻴﺎز )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 303(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 303‬ ‫أﻟﻘﻲ ﻧﻈﺮة ﻋﻠﻰ آﻞ ﺧﻄﻮط اﻻﻧﺤﻴﺎز ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺳﻢ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 403(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 403‬ ‫81- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ View‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Named Views‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ View‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ 1 ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺖ ‪ Named‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ Set Current‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫- 361 -‬
  • 162. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫اﻟﺪرس اﻟﺘﺎﺳﻊ ﻋﺸﺮ: ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ و ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺧﻄﻮط اﻻﻧﺤﻴﺎز ‪Lesson 19: Defining and Editing Alignments‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺪرس ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺧﻂ اﻧﺤﻴﺎز ‪ Alignment‬ﻟﺨﻂ اﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﻟﻠﻄﺮﻳﻖ ‪ Roadway Centerline‬أو ﺧﻄﻮط ﻟﻠﺤﺎﺟﺰ‬ ‫اﻟﺤﺠﺮي ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻓﺔ اﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ ‪ Curb Line‬أو ﻇﻮاهﺮ أﺧﺮى ﻣﻦ ﻇﻮاهﺮ اﻟﻄﺮق، و ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺧﻂ اﻻﻧﺤﻴﺎز و ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺗﻘﺎرﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺧﻄﻮط‬ ‫اﻻﻧﺤﻴﺎز ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ‪.Horizontal Alignment Editor‬‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ هﺬا اﻟﺪرس:‬ ‫1- ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Land Desktop‬‬ ‫2- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ File‬أﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Open‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Open Drawing: Project Based‬‬ ‫إن اﻟﻤﺴﺎر اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻤﺸﺮوع ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﺴﺎر 6002 ‪ C:Land Projects‬ﻓﺈن آﻨﺖ ﻗﺪ ﻏﻴﺮت هﺬا اﻟﻤﺴﺎر أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺼﻴﺐ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻓﻴﺠﺐ أن ﺗﻀﻊ ذﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ اﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎر.‬ ‫3- ﻣــﻦ ﻗـﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Project Name‬اﺧـــﺘــﺮ 2‪ TUTORIAL‬و ﻣﻦ ﻗـﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Select Project Drawing‬اﺧــﺘــــﺮ‬ ‫‪ Lesson-19.dwg‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫4- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Projects‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Workspaces‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Land Desktop‬ﻟﺘﻌﺮض ﻗﻮاﺋﻢ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Land Desktop‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺧﻂ اﻧﺤﻴﺎز ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﻌﺪد ﺧﻄﻮط ‪Defining an Alignment from a Polyline‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺧﻂ اﻻﻧﺤﻴﺎز اﻷول ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﻌﺪد اﻟﺨﻄﻮط اﻷﺣﻤﺮ اﻟﻠﻮن.‬ ‫1- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Alignments‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪.Define from Polyline‬‬ ‫2- اﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺘﻌﺪد اﻟﺨﻄﻮط ﻣﻦ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ.‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﻇﻬﻮر ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ X‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮن اﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﻄﺮف اﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﺨﻂ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 503(‬ ‫3- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ آﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻟﺨﻂ اﻻﻧﺤﻴﺎز و ﺗﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Define Alignment‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 503‬ ‫4- أدﺧﻞ 1‪ A‬أﻣﺎم ‪ Alignment Name‬و ادﺧﻞ ‪ Alignment #1 - Seguin Trail‬أﻣﺎم ‪) Description‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬ ‫603(.‬ ‫5- أﻗﺒﻞ اﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ 000.0 أﻣﺎم ‪) Starting Station‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 603( ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫- 461 -‬
  • 163. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 603‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺧﻂ اﻻﻧﺤﻴﺎز ‪ Alignment‬اﻷول ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﻌﺪد اﻟﺨﻄﻮط ‪ ،Polyline‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﺧﻂ اﻻﻧﺤﻴﺎز اﻷول ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﺮ اﻷواﻣﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻀﻤﻨﺔ اﻟﻮﺻﻒ و اﻻﺳﻢ و اﻟﺮﻗﻢ و اﻟﻄﻮل و ﻣﺤﻄﺔ اﻟﺒﺪء و ﻣﺤﻄﺔ اﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 703(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 703‬ ‫إذا آﺎن ﺧﻂ اﻻﻧﺤﻴﺎز ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺣﻠﺰون ﻓﻴﺠﺐ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻔﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎت ‪ Entities or Objects‬ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Alignments‬و ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‬ ‫اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Define from Objects‬و ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ اﻟﺤﻠﺰون ﻣﻦ ‪.Define from Polyline‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺧﻂ اﻧﺤﻴﺎز ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪة آﺎﺋﻨﺎت ‪Defining an Alignment from Objects‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺧﻂ اﻻﻧﺤﻴﺎز اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪة آﺎﺋﻨﺎت ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻠﺔ.‬ ‫1- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ View‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Named Views‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ View‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ 2 ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺖ ‪ Named‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ Set Current‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫2- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺎت ‪ Layer List‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ 2-‪ CL‬و ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻏﻼق ﻋﺮض ﺑﺎﻗﻲ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺎت )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 803(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 803‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺧﻂ اﻧﺤﻴﺎز أﺻﻔﺮ اﻟﻠﻮن ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ 2-‪ CL‬ﻓﻲ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ، ﺧﻂ اﻻﻧﺤﻴﺎز هﺬا ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪة آﺎﺋﻨﺎت ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺒﻌﻀﻬﺎ اﻟﺒﻌﺾ، ﺳﺘﻘﻮم‬ ‫ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺧﻂ اﻧﺤﻴﺎز ﺛﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻠﻚ اﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎت ﺑﺪأ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ اﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻨﻪ.‬ ‫3- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Alignments‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪.Define from Objects‬‬ ‫4- اﺧﺘﺮ اﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ اﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﻟﻠﻤﻤﺎس اﻷول اﻟﺬي ﻳﻘﻊ إﻟﻰ اﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ اﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻂ اﻻﻧﺤﻴﺎز.‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ X‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮن اﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ اﻟﺒﺪء ﻟﺨﻂ اﻻﻧﺤﻴﺎز )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 903(.‬ ‫5- ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر آﻞ اﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎت ﻣﻦ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) Enter‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 903(.‬ ‫- 561 -‬
  • 164. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 903‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪد اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ اﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ‪ Reference Point‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ اﻟﺪاﺋﺮة اﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮدة ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪد ﻗﻴﻤﺔ اﻟﻤﺤﻄﺔ اﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ.‬ ‫6- أﻣﺎم ‪ Select Reference Point‬ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﺮ اﻷواﻣﺮ أدﺧﻞ ‪ Apostrophe) '-View‬ﺛﻢ ‪ Dash‬ﺛﻢ ‪) (View‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬ ‫013( ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﺛﻢ أدﺧﻞ ‪ R‬ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎر ‪ Restore‬و اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﺛﻢ ادﺧﻞ 3 ﻻﺳﻢ اﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ اﻟﻤﺮاد اﺳﺘﺮدادﻩ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ و اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Enter‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 013‬ ‫7- ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ‪ Center Osnap‬اﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ اﻟﺪاﺋﺮة اﻟﺘﻲ أﻣﺎﻣﻚ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 113( آﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﺛﻢ ادﺧﻞ 36.87751‬ ‫آﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﻄﺔ اﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 113‬ ‫8- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Define Alignment‬‬ ‫- 661 -‬
  • 165. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫9- أدﺧﻞ 2‪ A‬أﻣﺎم ‪ Alignment Name‬و أدﺧﻞ 96 ‪ Alignment #2 - Highway‬أﻣﺎم ‪) Description‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬ ‫213(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 213‬ ‫01- أﻗﺒﻞ اﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻴﺔ أﻣﺎم ‪ Starting Station‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺧﻂ اﻻﻧﺤﻴﺎز ‪ Alignment‬اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪة آﺎﺋﻨﺎت و أﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﺮض ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺗﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﺮ اﻷواﻣﺮ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 313(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 313‬ ‫11- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ View‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Named Views‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ View‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ 1 ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺖ ‪ Named‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ Set Current‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 413‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎهﺪة و ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﺧﻂ اﻻﻧﺤﻴﺎز ‪Viewing and Editing Alignment Data‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﺴﺘﺨﺪم ‪ Horizontal Alignment Editor‬ﻟﻤﺸﺎهﺪة ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﻣﺘﻌﺪد اﻟﺨﻄﻮط و اﻟﻤﻨﺤﻨﻰ و اﻟﺤﻠﺰون ﺑﺨﻂ اﻻﻧﺤﻴﺎز‬ ‫اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ 2‪.Alignment A‬‬ ‫1- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Alignments‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Edit‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ‪.Horizontal Alignment Editor‬‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺸﺎهﺪة اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺤﻨﻰ اﻷول ﺑﺨﻂ اﻻﻧﺤﻴﺎز.‬ ‫2- ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Edit‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺼﻒ اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺖ اﻟﻌﻤﻮد ‪ Station‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) Edit Curve‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 513(‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﻧﺎﻓﺬة ‪.Curve Detail‬‬ ‫- 761 -‬
  • 166. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 513‬ ‫3- ﺑﻌﺪ اﻧﺘﻬﺎﺋﻚ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺸﺎهﺪة ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﻤﻨﺤﻨﻰ اﻷول اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Next‬ﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ إﻟﻰ اﻟﻤﻨﺤﻨﻰ اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 613(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 613‬ ‫4- ﻋﻨﺪ اﻧﺘﻬﺎﺋﻚ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺸﺎهﺪة ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﻤﻨﺤﻨﻰ اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮع إﻟﻰ ‪.Horizontal Alignment Editor‬‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ إﺣﺪاﺛﻲ اﻟﺸﻤﺎل ‪ Northing‬ﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪد اﻟﺨﻄﻮط اﻟﺮاﺑﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻂ اﻻﻧﺤﻴﺎز ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻜﻪ 04 ﻣﺘﺮ ﻧﺤﻮ اﻟﺠﻨﻮب.‬ ‫5- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺼﻒ اﻟﺮاﺑﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺖ اﻟﻌﻤﻮد ‪ Northing‬ﺛﻢ ادﺧﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻠﻚ اﻟﺨﺎﻧﺔ 334.5258105 آﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻹﺣﺪاﺛﻲ اﻟﺸﻤﺎل اﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) Enter‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 713(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 713‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ آﻼ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﺤﻄﺔ و اﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻟﺘﺘﺎﺧﻢ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ اﻟﻤﻤﺎس ﻣﻦ ﺧﻂ اﻻﻧﺤﻴﺎز.‬ ‫- 861 -‬
  • 167. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺗﻘﺎرﻳﺮ ﻟﺨﻂ اﻻﻧﺤﻴﺎز ‪Generating Alignment Reports‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺘﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺮ ﻟﺨﻂ اﻻﻧﺤﻴﺎز.‬ ‫1- ﻣﻦ ﻧﺎﻓﺬة ‪ Horizontal Alignment Editor‬و ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Reports‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Settings‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار‬ ‫‪.Output Settings‬‬ ‫2- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Output Options‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪) File‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 813(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 813‬ ‫3- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) Output File Name‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 813( ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ Output File Name‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺎر ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺛﻢ أدﺧﻞ ‪ Report1.prn‬أﻣﺎم ‪) File name‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 913(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 913‬ ‫4- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Save‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮع إﻟﻰ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ Output Settings‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮع إﻟﻰ ‪Horizontal‬‬ ‫‪.Alignment Editor‬‬ ‫- 961 -‬
  • 168. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫5- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Station/Curve‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ اﻟﺒﺪء اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻴﺔ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻘﺒﻞ اﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﻄﺔ اﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ.‬ ‫6- أﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﻘﺒﻞ اﻻﺳﻢ و اﻟﻤﺴﺎر اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ﻟﻤﻠﻒ اﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺮ و هﻮ ‪ Report1.prn‬و ﺗﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار‬ ‫‪) Horizontal Alignment Station and Curve Report‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 023(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 023‬ ‫7- ﻋﻨﺪ اﻧﺘﻬﺎﺋﻚ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺸﺎهﺪة اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮع إﻟﻰ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Horizontal Alignment Editor‬‬ ‫8- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Save‬ﺛﻢ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻆ أن ﺧﻂ اﻻﻧﺤﻴﺎز ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺮك ﻟﻴﻌﻜﺲ اﻟﺘﻐﻴﺮ اﻟﺬي ﺗﻢ ﻓﻲ اﻟـ ‪.Horizontal Alignment Editor‬‬ ‫- 071 -‬
  • 169. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫اﻟﺪرس اﻟﻌﺸﺮون: إﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺤﻄﺎت و إزاﺣﺔ ﻟﺨﻂ اﻻﻧﺤﻴﺎز ‪Lesson 20: Creating Alignment Stationing and‬‬ ‫‪Offsets‬‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻄﺎت ﺧﻂ اﻻﻧﺤﻴﺎز ﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ اﻟﺰﻳﺎدة اﻟﻤﺘﺴﺎوﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﺎت ﺧﻂ اﻻﻧﺤﻴﺎز، ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء إزاﺣﺔ ﻟﺘﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﻄﺮق ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺎ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺣﺎﻓﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺮﺻﻴﻒ و ﺣﻮاف اﻟﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﺎت و هﻜﺬا...‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ هﺬا اﻟﺪرس:‬ ‫1- ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Land Desktop‬‬ ‫2- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ File‬أﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Open‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Open Drawing: Project Based‬‬ ‫إن اﻟﻤﺴﺎر اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻤﺸﺮوع ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﺴﺎر 6002 ‪ C:Land Projects‬ﻓﺈن آﻨﺖ ﻗﺪ ﻏﻴﺮت هﺬا اﻟﻤﺴﺎر أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺼﻴﺐ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻓﻴﺠﺐ أن ﺗﻀﻊ ذﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ اﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎر.‬ ‫3- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋـﻤﺔ ‪ Project Name‬اﺧـــﺘــــﺮ 2‪ TUTORIAL‬و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Select Project Drawing‬اﺧــــﺘـــﺮ‬ ‫‪ Lesson-20.dwg‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫4- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Projects‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Workspaces‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Land Desktop‬ﻟﺘﻌﺮض ﻗﻮاﺋﻢ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Land Desktop‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ إﻋﺪادات اﻟﻤﺤﻄﺔ ‪Changing Station Settings‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ إﻋﺪادات اﻟﻤﺤﻄﺔ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ اﻷﺳﺎس و إﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﺎدﺋﺔ ﻻﺳﻢ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ و إﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ ﻟﺒﺪاﻳﺔ اﻟﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﺎت و‬ ‫ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ اﻟﻤﻨﺤﻨﻰ ﻣﻊ اﻟﻤﻤﺎس.‬ ‫1- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Alignments‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Station Display Format‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪Edit Station‬‬ ‫‪.Format‬‬ ‫2- ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Station/Chainage Numeric Format‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪ Station base value‬إﻟﻰ 0001 ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ‬ ‫اﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ اﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻖ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 123(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 123‬ ‫3- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Alignment‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Alignment Labels‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪Alignment Labels‬‬ ‫‪.Settings‬‬ ‫4- ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Layer Prefix‬أدﺧﻞ -* )‪ (Asterisk Hyphen‬أﻣﺎم ‪) Layer Prefix‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 223(.‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻘﻮم هﺬا ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ اﺳﻢ ﺧﻂ اﻻﻧﺤﻴﺎز آﺒﺎدﺋﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺎت اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺸﺄ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ إﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺤﻄﺎت ﻟﺨﻂ اﻻﻧﺤﻴﺎز.‬ ‫- 171 -‬
  • 170. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 223‬ ‫5- ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Label Text‬أدﺧﻞ ‪ BC‬أﻣﺎم ‪ Beginning of curve‬و أدﺧﻞ ‪ EC‬أﻣﺎم ‪) Curve/Tangent intersect‬اﻧﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 223( ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ أن إﻧﺸﺎء اﻟﻤﺤﻄﺎت ﻳﻤﻜﻦ اﻧﺠﺎزﻩ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ واﺣﺪة و ﻟﻜﻦ هﺬا اﻟﺪرس ﻳﺮﻳﻚ آﻴﻔﻴﺔ إﻧﺸﺎء ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ اﻟﻤﺤﻄﺎت ﺑﻨﺴﻖ ﻣﺤﺪد ﻟﻠﻨﺺ و‬ ‫إزاﺣﺔ أوﻻ ﺛﻢ ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ ﻟﻨﻘﺎط اﻟﻤﺤﻄﺎت ﺑﻨﺴﻖ ﻟﻠﻨﺺ و إزاﺣﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺘﻴﻦ.‬ ‫6- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Alignment‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Station Label Settings‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪Alignment Station Label‬‬ ‫‪.Settings‬‬ ‫7- ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈزاﻟﺔ اﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﻣﻦ أﻣﺎم ‪ Station point labels‬و أدﺧﻞ 05 م أﻣﺎم ‪ Station label increment‬و 01 م أﻣﺎم‬ ‫‪ Station tick increment‬و 2 م أﻣﺎم ‪) Station label offset‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 323( ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 323‬ ‫8- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Utilities‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Set Text Style‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Text Style‬‬ ‫- 271 -‬
  • 171. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫9- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Style Name‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪) 2MM‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 423( ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Close‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 423‬ ‫اﻵن ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻧﺴﻖ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻌﻨﻮﻧﺔ اﻟﻤﺤﻄﺎت.‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻣﺤﻄﺎت ﺧﻂ اﻻﻧﺤﻴﺎز ‪Generating Alignment Stationing‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﻄﺎت ﻟﺨﻂ اﻻﻧﺤﻴﺎز، أوﻻ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺧﻂ اﻻﻧﺤﻴﺎز اﻟﻨﺸﻂ أو اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻴﻜﻮن ‪.A1b‬‬ ‫1- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Alignments‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Set Current Alignment‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار‬ ‫‪.Alignment Librarian‬‬ ‫2- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Selection‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪) A1b‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 523( ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 523‬ ‫- 371 -‬
  • 172. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫3- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Alignments‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪.Create Station Labels‬‬ ‫4- اﻗﺒﻞ اﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺤﻄﺎت اﻟﺒﺪء و اﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى ﻟﺘﻘﺒﻞ اﻟﺨﻴﺎر‬ ‫اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ‪ Yes‬ﻟﺤﺬف ﻃﺒﻘﺎت اﻟﻌﻨﻮﻧﺔ اﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮدة ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺳﻢ.‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ اﻟﻤﺤﻄﺎت ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 623(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 623‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻀﻴﻒ ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ ﻟﻨﻘﺎط اﻟﻤﺤﻄﺎت ﻟﺨﻂ اﻻﻧﺤﻴﺎز.‬ ‫5- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Alignments‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Station Label Settings‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪Alignment Stationing‬‬ ‫‪.Settings‬‬ ‫6- ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈزاﻟﺔ اﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﻣﻦ أﻣﺎم ‪ Station labels‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Station point labels‬ﺛﻢ أدﺧﻞ 52 م أﻣﺎم ‪Station label‬‬ ‫‪) offset‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 723( ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 723‬ ‫- 471 -‬
  • 173. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫7- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Utilities‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Set Text Style‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Text Style‬‬ ‫8- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Style Name‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ 3MM‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) Close‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 823(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 823‬ ‫اﻵن ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻧﺴﻖ ﻟﻌﻨﻮﻧﺔ ﻧﻘﺎط اﻟﻤﺤﻄﺎت.‬ ‫9- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Alignments‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪.Create Station Labels‬‬ ‫01- اﻗﺒﻞ اﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺤﻄﺎت اﻟﺒﺪء و اﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى ﻟﺘﻘﺒﻞ اﻟﺨﻴﺎر‬ ‫اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ‪ Yes‬ﻟﺤﺬف ﻃﺒﻘﺎت اﻟﻌﻨﻮﻧﺔ اﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮدة ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺳﻢ.‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ ﻟﻨﻘﺎط اﻟﻤﺤﻄﺎت ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ، ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻴﺎت ذات أﻧﺼﺎف أﻗﻄﺎر ﺻﻐﻴﺮة ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺘﺎج اﻟﻌﻨﻮﻧﺔ أﺣﻴﺎﻧﺎ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﻳﺪوﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻮح.‬ ‫11- ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ اﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ‪ Zoom in‬ﻟﺘﺸﺎهﺪ ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ ﻧﻘﺎط اﻟﻤﺤﻄﺎت )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 923(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 923‬ ‫- 571 -‬
  • 174. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫إﻧﺸﺎء إزاﺣﺔ ‪Creating Offsets‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ إزاﺣﺔ ﻟﺤﺎﻓﺔ اﻟﺮﺻﻴﻒ و اﻟﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﺎت و اﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ اﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ.‬ ‫1- ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﺮض اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ‪ Zoom out‬ﻟﻠﻤﺸﻬﺪ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ.‬ ‫2- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Alignments‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Create Offsets‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Alignment Offset Settings‬‬ ‫3- ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Outer offset‬أدﺧﻞ 0 م أﻣﺎم ‪ Left offset‬و أدﺧﻞ 52 م أﻣﺎم ‪) Right offset‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 033(.‬ ‫4- ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Second offset‬أﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Second offset‬ﺛﻢ ادﺧﻞ 5.6 م أﻣﺎم ‪ Left offset‬و أﻳﻀﺎ 5.6 م أﻣﺎم ‪Right‬‬ ‫‪) offset‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 033(.‬ ‫5- ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Inner offset‬ﺗﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ أﻣﺎم آﻼ ﻣﻦ ‪ Left offset‬و ‪ Right offset‬هﻲ 52.4 م )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 033( ﺛﻢ‬ ‫أﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 033‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ اﻟﺨﻄﻮط اﻟﻤﺰاﺣﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 133(.‬ ‫- 671 -‬
  • 175. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 133‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ Alignment Offset Settings‬ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ اﻟﺨﻴﺎر ﻟﺤﺬف ﺧﻄﻮط ﻣﺰاﺣﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﻮدة ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺎ و‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺧﻄﻮط ﻣﺰاﺣﺔ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﻋﻨﺪ اﺳﺘﻌﺮاض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ Alignment Offset Settings‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪Cancel‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ﻟﻠﺨﺮوج ﻣﻨﻪ دون ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺧﻄﻮط ﻣﺰاﺣﺔ.‬ ‫- 771 -‬